S9300&9300e Hardware Installation And Maintenance Guide.pdf

S9300&S9300E Series Switches

Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide Issue

06

Date

2015-10-23

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2015. All rights reserved. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Trademarks and Permissions and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders.

Notice The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information, and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representations of any kind, either express or implied. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and recommendations in this document do not constitute a warranty of any kind, express or implied.

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Address:

Huawei Industrial Base Bantian, Longgang Shenzhen 518129 People's Republic of China

Website:

http://www.huawei.com

Email:

[email protected]

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

i

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

About This Document

About This Document

Intended Audience This document describes hardware installation procedures for the S9300&S9300E series switches, troubleshooting methods for common hardware faults, and switch maintenance instructions. This document is intended for: l

Network planning engineers

l

Hardware installation engineers

l

Commissioning engineers

l

Onsite maintenance engineers

l

System maintenance engineers

Symbol Conventions The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Symbol

Description Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury. Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury. Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor or moderate injury.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

ii

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

About This Document

Symbol

Description Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in equipment damage, data loss, performance deterioration, or unanticipated results. NOTICE is used to address practices not related to personal injury. Calls attention to important information, best practices and tips.

NOTE

NOTE is used to address information not related to personal injury, equipment damage, and environment deterioration.

Command Conventions The command conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Convention

Description

Boldface

The keywords of a command line are in boldface.

Italic

Command arguments are in italics.

[]

Items (keywords or arguments) in brackets [ ] are optional.

{ x | y | ... }

Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by vertical bars. One item is selected.

[ x | y | ... ]

Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by vertical bars. One item is selected or no item is selected.

{ x | y | ... }*

Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by vertical bars. A minimum of one item or a maximum of all items can be selected.

[ x | y | ... ]*

Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by vertical bars. Several items or no item can be selected.

&<1-n>

The parameter before the & sign can be repeated 1 to n times.

#

A line starting with the # sign is comments.

Declaration This manual is only a reference for you to configure your devices. The contents in the manual, such as web pages, command line syntax, and command outputs, are based on the device Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

iii

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

About This Document

conditions in the lab. The manual provides instructions for general scenarios, but do not cover all usage scenarios of all product models. The contents in the manual may be different from your actual device situations due to the differences in software versions, models, and configuration files. The manual will not list every possible difference. You should configure your devices according to actual situations. The specifications provided in this manual are tested in lab environment (for example, the tested device has been installed with a certain type of boards or only one protocol is run on the device). Results may differ from the listed specifications when you attempt to obtain the maximum values with multiple functions enabled on the device.

Change History Changes between document issues are cumulative. The latest document issue contains all the changes made in earlier issues.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23) The documentation is modified according to product updates.

Issue 05 (2015-07-31) The documentation is modified according to product updates.

Issue 04 (2015-02-12) The documentation is modified according to product updates.

Issue 03 (2014-05-25) The documentation is modified according to product updates.

Issue 02 (2014-03-20) The documentation is modified according to product updates.

Issue 01 (2013-10-30) This is the first official release.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

iv

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

Contents

Contents About This Document.....................................................................................................................ii 1 Switches Overview........................................................................................................................1 2 Installation Procedure...................................................................................................................4 3 Preparing for Installation.............................................................................................................6 3.1 Reading the Safety Precautions...................................................................................................................................... 7 3.2 Checking the Installation Site.........................................................................................................................................8 3.3 Checking the Cabinet/Rack.......................................................................................................................................... 10 3.4 Checking the Power Distribution Environment............................................................................................................13 3.4.1 DC Power Supply...................................................................................................................................................... 13 3.4.2 AC Power Supply...................................................................................................................................................... 34 3.5 Preparing Installation Tools and Accessories............................................................................................................... 59

4 Unpacking a Switch.................................................................................................................... 65 4.1 Unpacking a Crate........................................................................................................................................................ 66 4.2 Unpacking a Carton...................................................................................................................................................... 67 4.3 Unpacking a Card......................................................................................................................................................... 69

5 Installing Switches...................................................................................................................... 71 5.1 Installing S9303&S9303E Chassis............................................................................................................................... 72 5.2 Installing S9306&S9306E Chassis............................................................................................................................... 78 5.3 Installing S9312&S9312E Chassis............................................................................................................................... 83

6 Installing Modules...................................................................................................................... 90 6.1 Installing a Power Module............................................................................................................................................91 6.2 (Optional) Installing a CSS Subcard or an Enhanced Flexible Service Subcard......................................................... 92 6.3 (Optional) Installing a CKM Daughter Card................................................................................................................ 94 6.4 Installing a Card............................................................................................................................................................96 6.5 Installing Cable Management Frames........................................................................................................................ 100

7 Connecting Switches.................................................................................................................102 7.1 Connecting Power Cables...........................................................................................................................................103 7.1.1 Connecting DC Power Cables................................................................................................................................. 103 7.1.2 Connecting AC Power Cables................................................................................................................................. 109 7.2 Connecting Network Cables....................................................................................................................................... 114 Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

v

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

Contents

7.3 Connecting High-Speed Cables.................................................................................................................................. 117 7.4 Installing Optical Modules and Connecting Optical Fibers....................................................................................... 122

8 Post-Installation Checking...................................................................................................... 129 9 Powering on a Switch for the First Time.............................................................................. 132 10 Switch Cluster Setup Guide.................................................................................................. 136 10.1 S9300 Clustering Using CSS Cards......................................................................................................................... 137 10.2 S300E Clustering Using CSS Cards......................................................................................................................... 139 10.3 S9300&S9300E Clustering Using Service Ports......................................................................................................142

11 Maintaining Switches.............................................................................................................144 11.1 Replacing a Power Module.......................................................................................................................................145 11.2 Replacing a Fan Module........................................................................................................................................... 150 11.3 Replacing a Service Card..........................................................................................................................................154 11.4 Replacing an MPU....................................................................................................................................................156 11.4.1 Replacing the Only MPU on a Switch (Services Are Interrupted)........................................................................156 11.4.2 Replacing the Only MPU on a Switch (Services Are Still Running).................................................................... 158 11.4.3 Replacing One of the MPUs on a Switch.............................................................................................................. 160 11.5 Replacing an Optical Module................................................................................................................................... 163 11.6 Replacing an Air Filter............................................................................................................................................. 165

12 Hardware Troubleshooting................................................................................................... 169 12.1 A Card Resets Unexpectedly.................................................................................................................................... 170 12.2 A Card Fails to Register........................................................................................................................................... 172 12.3 Files Cannot Be Written into the CF Card................................................................................................................174 12.4 A Power Module Does Not Work Normally............................................................................................................ 175

13 Appendix................................................................................................................................... 180 13.1 Appendix A List of Indicators.................................................................................................................................. 181 13.2 Appendix B On-site Cable Assembly and Installation............................................................................................. 183 13.2.1 Cable Assembly Precautions................................................................................................................................. 183 13.2.2 Assembling Power Cables..................................................................................................................................... 184 13.2.3 Assembling Ethernet Cables..................................................................................................................................193 13.2.4 Installing Cable Accessories..................................................................................................................................207 13.2.5 Replacing the Mold of the Crimping Tool.............................................................................................................223 13.3 Appendix C Environmental Requirements for Device Operation............................................................................226 13.3.1 Environmental Requirements for an Equipment Room........................................................................................ 226 13.3.2 Requirements for Power Supply............................................................................................................................234 13.4 Appendix D Equipment Grounding Specifications.................................................................................................. 237 13.4.1 General Grounding Specifications.........................................................................................................................237 13.4.2 Grounding Specifications for an Equipment Room.............................................................................................. 237 13.4.3 Grounding Specifications for Devices...................................................................................................................237 13.4.4 Grounding Specifications for Communications Power Supply.............................................................................238 13.4.5 Grounding Specifications for Signal Cables......................................................................................................... 239 Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

vi

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

Contents

13.4.6 Specifications for Laying Out Grounding Cables................................................................................................. 239 13.5 Appendix E Engineering Labels for Cables............................................................................................................. 240 13.5.1 Introduction to Labels............................................................................................................................................240 13.5.2 Engineering Labels for Optical Fibers...................................................................................................................248 13.5.3 Engineering Labels for Network Cables............................................................................................................... 251 13.5.4 Engineering Labels for User Cables...................................................................................................................... 252 13.5.5 Engineering Labels for Power Cables................................................................................................................... 253 13.6 Appendix F Guide to Using Optical Modules.......................................................................................................... 256 13.7 Appendix G Fault Tag.............................................................................................................................................. 259

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

vii

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

1 Switches Overview

1

Switches Overview

NOTE

The figures in this document are for reference only.

S9300 Series The S9300 series is available in three models: S9303, S9306, and S9312. Figure 1-1 shows the three chassis models. Figure 1-1 S9303, S9306, and S9312 chassis

RUN/ALM

Quidway

1

1

1

1

RUN/ALM

Quidway

1

1

1

2

3

2

3

2

3

4

5

4

5

4

5

6

7

6

7

8

9

8

9

8

6

9

7

10 11

10 11

10 11

12 13

12 13

12 13

14 15

14 15

14 15

16 17

16 17

16 17

18 19

18 19

18 19

20 21

22 23

24 25

28 29

26 27

30 31

32 33

34 35

36 37

38 39

40 41

42 43

44 75

3

2

3

2

3

2

3

2

1

S9306

2

3

S9312

4

5

4

5

4

5

4

5

4

5

8

6

7

6

7

8

6

7

6

7

6

RUN/ALM

2

1

3

4

5

6

9

8

9

8

9

8 7

46 47

9

8 7

9

9

10 11

10 11

10 11

10 11

10 11

10 11

12 13

12 13

12 13

12 13

12 13

12 13

14 15

14 15

14 15

14 15

14 15

14 15

16 17

16 17

16 17

16 17

16 17

16 17

18 19

18 19

18 19

18 19

18 19

18 19

20 21

20 21

20 21

20 21

20 21

20 21

22 23

22 23

22 23

22 23

22 23

22 23

20 21

22 23

24 25

24 25

30 31

30 31

32 33

32 33

34 35

34 35

36 37

36 37

38 39

38 39

40 41

40 41

42 43

Quidway

1

44 75

44 75

CLK2

6

7

6

7

8

9

8

9

10 11

10 11

12 13

12 13

14 15

14 15

16 17

16 17

18 19

18 19

20 21

20 21

22 23

22 23

22 23

24 25

24 25

24 25

26 27

26 27

26 27

28 29

28 29

28 29

30 31

30 31

30 31

34 35

32 33

34 35

32 33

34 35

32 33

3

4

5

6

8 7

9

10 11

12 13

14 15

16 17

18 19

ETH

38 39

40 41

40 41

42 43

42 43

44 75

46 47

1

38 39

40 41

42 43

2

3

2

3

5

4

5

12 13

14 15

16 17

18 19

20 21

22 23

24 25

24 25

46 47

1

RUN/ALM

8

6

ACT RUN/ALM

9

7

10 11 SLAVE

12 13

14 15

16 17

18 19

20 21

22 23

24 25

44 75

≤45

OFF

RUN/ALM

42 43

44 75

46 47 RUN/ALM

42 43

42 43

44 75

46 47 RUN/ALM

44 75

46 47

ETH ACT RUN/ALM

2

3

4

5

6

8 7

9

10 11

12 13

14 15

16 17

18 19

20 21

22 23

30 31

30 31

32 33

32 33

32 33

34 35

34 35

34 35

36 37

40 41

42 43

44 75

46 47 RUN/ALM

1

38 39

40 41

42 43

44 75

36 37

38 39

3

2

3

RUN/ALM

42 43

44 75

4

5

4

5

6

8 7

9

46 47

1

40 41

2

6

8 7

9

46 47

PoE4 1

PoE3

2

3

2

3

4

5

4

5

6

7

6

7

8

9

8

9

10 11

10 11

10 11

12 13

12 13

12 13

14 15

14 15

14 15

16 17

16 17

16 17

18 19

18 19

18 19

20 21

20 21

20 21

22 23

22 23

22 23

PoE2 PoE1

CMU

PWR4 1

PWR1

MASTER

10 11 SLAVE

12 13

14 15

16 17

18 19

20 21

22 23

24 25

24 25

24 25

24 25

24 25

24 25

28 29

26 27

28 29

26 27

28 29

26 27

28 29

26 27

28 29

26 27

28 29

26 27

30 31

30 31

30 31

30 31

30 31

30 31

32 33

32 33

32 33

32 33

32 33

32 33

34 35

ACT RUN/ALM

34 35

34 35

34 35

34 35

34 35

36 37

36 37

36 37

36 37

36 37

36 37

38 39

38 39

38 39

38 39

38 39

38 39

40 41

40 41

40 41

40 41

40 41

40 41

42 43

44 75

46 47 RUN/ALM

42 43

44 75

46 47 RUN/ALM

42 43

44 75

46 47 RUN/ALM

42 43

44 75

46 47 RUN/ALM

42 43

42 43

44 75

46 47 RUN/ALM

44 75

46 47

PoE4

PoE3

PoE2

PoE1

CMU

PWR4

PWR3

PWR2 PWR1

46 47

ACT RUN/ALM

RUN

28 29

26 27

30 31

38 39

PWR3

kg（99

≤75

lb）

ETH

ON

28 29

26 27

36 37

PWR2

CON

FAULT

ALM

RUN ON

lb）

28 29

26 27

RUN/ALM

44 75

MASTER

36 37

22 23

MON

OFF

RS485

kg（55

36 37

38 39

20 21

RS485

ACT RUN/ALM ETH CON MON

≤25

36 37

10 11

40 41

46 47

RS485

5

20 21

9

7

40 41

44 75

RUN/ALM

2

22 23

RS485

5

4

18 19

8

6

38 39

40 41

RUN/ALM

42 43

ETH

CON

S9303

4

38 39

46 47

kg（165

lb）

MON

5

4

16 17

18 19

36 37

38 39

46 47 RUN/ALM

44 75

CON

MON

4

14 15

16 17

36 37

40 41

44 75

CON

20 21

RS485

3

12 13

14 15

34 35

36 37

38 39

42 43

RST

RST

RS485

3

2

10 11

12 13

32 33

36 37

42 43

46 47

MON

3

2

9

10 11

32 33

34 35

36 37

40 41

46 47

ACT RUN/ALM

CLK1

MON

2

8

9

30 31

34 35

FAULT

1

7

ALM

1

6

8

30 31

34 35

40 41

RUN/ALM

42 43

1

7

28 29

26 27

32 33

34 35

38 39

CLK2

ETH

RUN/ALM

6

28 29

26 27

32 33

38 39

RST

CON

RST

5

24 25

30 31

32 33

36 37

RUN/ALM

28 29

26 27

CLK2

4

24 25

28 29

26 27

30 31

34 35

RUN/ALM

28 29

26 27

CLK1

3

24 25

28 29

26 27

30 31

32 33

CLK2

22 23

1

2

24 25

28 29

26 27

30 31

CLK1

RUN/ALM

1

24 25

28 29

26 27

CLK1

20 21

RUN/ALM

RUN/ALM

24 25

ON

P O E

CMUA ON ON

P W R 2

ON ON

P W R 1

RUN

FAULT

FAULT

ON

1

ALM

ON

2

FAULT FAULT

ON

OFF

RUN

FAULT

FAULT

CMUA

ON

RUN

ALM

FAULT

1

2

RUN ALM

ALM

RUN

RUN ALM

RUN

FAULT

OFF

OFF

FAULT

ALM

ALM

OFF

OFF

OFF

S9303

CMUA ON

RUN

RUN ALM

RUN ALM

ALM

CMUA

FAULT

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

S9306

S9312

Table 1-1 lists the specifications of the S9300 series switches. Table 1-1 Specifications of the S9300 series switches

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Model

S9303

S9306

S9312

Height

175 mm (4 U)

441.7 mm (10 U)

663.95 mm (15 U)

W x D (without mounting brackets)

l With cable management frames: 442 mm x 585 mm l Without cable management frames: 442 mm x 489 mm

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

1

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

1 Switches Overview

Weight (empty/ fully loaded)

10 kg/22 kg

15 kg/42 kg

25 kg/70 kg

Maximum power consumption (fully loaded, without PoE power supply)

1000 W

2200 W

4200 W

Power parameters

l DC input voltage – Rated voltage: -48 V DC/-60 V DC – Maximum voltage range: -38.4 V DC to -72 V DC l AC input voltage – Rated voltage: 110 V AC/220 V AC, 50/60 Hz – Maximum voltage range: 90 V AC to 290 V AC; 47 Hz to 63 Hz (The output power reduces to half of the maximum output when the input voltage is in the range of 90 V AC to 175 V AC.) l Operating temperature and altitude:

Environment parameters

– -60 m to +1800 m: 0°C to 45°C – 1800 m to 4000 m: Temperature decreases by 1°C every time the altitude increases 220 m. – 4000 m: 0°C to 35°C l Operating relative humidity: 5% RH to 95% RH (noncondensing) l Storage temperature: -40°C to +70°C l Storage altitude: < 5000 m l Storage relative humidity: 5% RH to 95% RH (noncondensing)

S9300E Series The S9300E series is available in three models: S9303E, S9306E, and S9312E. Figure 1-2 shows the three chassis models. Figure 1-2 S9303E, S9306E, and S9312E chassis

RUN/ALM

S9312E

1

1

1

1

RUN/ALM

1

S9306E

1

1

1

2

3

2

3

2

3

4

5

4

5

4

5

6

7

6

7

6

7

8

9

8

9

8

9

10 11

10 11

10 11

12 13

12 13

12 13

14 15

14 15

14 15

16 17

16 17

16 17

18 19

18 19

18 19

20 21

20 21

20 21

22 23

24 25

26 27

28 29

30 31

32 33

34 35

36 37

38 39

40 41

42 43

44 75

2

3

2

3

2

3

2

3

2

3

4

5

4

5

4

5

4

5

4

5

6

7

6

7

6

7

6

7

6

7

46 47 RUN/ALM

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

8

9

9

8

9

8

9

8

8

9

9

10 11

10 11

10 11

10 11

10 11

10 11

22 23

24 25

24 25

26 27

26 27

28 29

30 31

30 31

32 33

32 33

34 35

34 35

36 37

36 37

38 39

38 39

CON

40 41

40 41

42 43

42 43

CLK1

44 75

9

10 11

10 11

12 13

12 13

14 15

16 17

16 17

18 19

18 19

20 21

20 21

22 23

22 23

24 25

24 25

26 27

26 27

28 29

28 29

30 31

34 35

32 33

34 35

32 33

36 37

36 37

36 37

38 39

38 39

38 39

40 41

40 41

42 43

42 43

RUN

P W R 2

CON

MON

44 75

46 47

1

2

3

2

3

5

4

5

6

7

8

9

10 11

12 13

14 15

16 17

18 19

20 21

22 23

22 23

24 25

24 25

26 27

26 27

RUN/ALM

44 75

46 47

1

RUN/ALM

6

7

8

9

10 11

12 13

14 15

16 17

18 19

20 21

42 43

44 75

26 27

28 29

28 29

28 29

28 29

30 31

30 31

30 31

30 31

30 31

32 33

32 33

32 33

32 33

32 33

32 33

22 23

24 25

26 27

34 35

34 35

34 35

34 35

34 35

34 35

36 37

36 37

36 37

36 37

36 37

36 37

38 39

38 39

38 39

38 39

38 39

38 39

CON

28 29

28 29

28 29

30 31

30 31

30 31

32 33

32 33

32 33

34 35

34 35

34 35

36 37

36 37

38 39

40 41

42 43

40 41

42 43

44 75

2

3

2

3

4

5

6

7

RUN/ALM

44 75

38 39

42 43

8

9

5

6

7

2

3

2

3

4

5

4

5

6

7

6

7

8

8

9

9

46 47 RUN/ALM

44 75

4

46 47

1

40 41

40 41

40 41

40 41

42 43

42 43

42 43

42 43

42 43

44 75

46 47 RUN/ALM

44 75

46 47 RUN/ALM

44 75

46 47 RUN/ALM

44 75

46 47 RUN/ALM

44 75

46 47 RUN/ALM

44 75

46 47

ETH ACT RUN/ALM

ETH ACT RUN/ALM

CLK2

RUN/ALM

1

38 39

40 41

42 43

RST

10 11

12 13

14 15

16 17

ACT RUN/ALM

36 37

40 41

CLK2

CLK1

18 19

20 21

24 25

22 23

ETH

CLK2

40 41

RST

46 47

1

2

3

2

3

4

5

4

5

6

7

8

9

8

9

8

9

10 11

10 11

10 11

10 11

CMU

PWR4

PWR3

1

PWR2

PWR1

40 41

ACT RUN/ALM

6

7

10 11

12 13

12 13

12 13

12 13

12 13

14 15

14 15

14 15

14 15

14 15

16 17

16 17

16 17

16 17

16 17

18 19

18 19

18 19

18 19

18 19

20 21

20 21

20 21

20 21

20 21

24 25

22 23

24 25

22 23

24 25

22 23

24 25

22 23

24 25

22 23

26 27

26 27

26 27

26 27

26 27

26 27

28 29

28 29

28 29

28 29

28 29

28 29

30 31

30 31

30 31

30 31

30 31

30 31

32 33

32 33

32 33

32 33

32 33

32 33

34 35

34 35

34 35

34 35

34 35

34 35

36 37

36 37

36 37

36 37

36 37

36 37

38 39

38 39

38 39

38 39

38 39

38 39

40 41

40 41

40 41

40 41

40 41

40 41

42 43

42 43

42 43

42 43

42 43

42 43

44 75

46 47 RUN/ALM

44 75

46 47 RUN/ALM

44 75

46 47 RUN/ALM

44 75

46 47 RUN/ALM

44 75

46 47 RUN/ALM

44 75

46 47

PWR6

PWR5

CMU

PWR4

PWR3

PWR2

PWR1

46 47

≤45

kg（99

≤75

lb）

ETH

CMUA ON ON ON ON

RUN

FAULT

FAULT

ALM

CMUA ON ON

1

2

FAULT FAULT

lb）

RUN

RUN ALM

RUN ALM

ALM

kg（165

CMUA

ON ON

OFF

S9306E

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

RUN

FAULT

RUN

FAULT

RUN

FAULT

CMUA

RUN ALM

ALM

ALM

ALM

OFF

OFF

OFF

S9303E Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

30 31

RS485

lb）

P W R 1

14 15

ETH

ON

CON

RUN

MON

34 35

32 33

4

26 27

28 29

30 31

RS485

9

8

30 31

20 21

22 23

26 27

RS485

8

28 29

18 19

24 25

26 27

28 29

MON

7

26 27

16 17

20 21

24 25

22 23

26 27

MON

7

6

24 25

14 15

18 19

20 21

24 25

22 23

RS485

6

22 23

12 13

RS485

5

20 21

10 11

18 19

20 21

24 25

22 23

MON

5

4

ON

kg（55

5

4

18 19

ACT RUN/ALM

RS485

≤25

4

16 17

9

MON

3

14 15

8

FAULT

3

2

12 13

ALM

3

2

10 11

7

16 17

18 19

20 21

24 25

22 23

26 27

46 47

RST

S9303E

OFF

2

9

FAULT

1

8

ALM

1

7

OFF

1

6

6

14 15

16 17

18 19

20 21

24 25

22 23

46 47

1

5

12 13

14 15

16 17

ACT RUN/ALM

1

4

12 13

14 15

16 17

18 19

20 21

RUN/ALM

44 75

RUN/ALM

3

12 13

14 15

16 17

18 19

ETH

CLK2

RST

2

12 13

14 15

16 17

CON

28 29

CON

1

12 13

14 15

CLK1

22 23

CLK1

RUN/ALM

12 13

1

2

FAULT

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

S9312E 2

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

1 Switches Overview

Table 1-2 lists the specifications of the S9300E series switches. Table 1-2 Specifications of the S9300E series switches Model

S9303E

S9306E

S9312E

Height

175 mm (4 U)

441.7 mm (10 U)

663.95 mm (15 U)

W x D (without mounting brackets)

l With cable management frames: 442 mm x 585 mm

Weight (empty/ fully loaded)

11 kg/25 kg

29 kg/45 kg

37 kg/70 kg

Maximum power consumption (fully loaded)

1100 W

2400 W

4500 W

Power parameters

l DC input voltage

l Without cable management frames: 442 mm x 489 mm

– Rated voltage: -48 V DC/-60 V DC – Maximum voltage range: -38.4 V DC to -72 V DC l AC input voltage – Rated voltage: 110 V AC/220 V AC, 50/60 Hz – Maximum voltage range: 90 V AC to 290 V AC; 47 Hz to 63 Hz (The output power reduces to half of the maximum output when the input voltage is in the range of 90 V AC to 175 V AC.) Environment parameters

l Operating temperature and altitude: – -60 m to +1800 m: 0°C to 45°C – 1800 m to 4000 m: Temperature decreases by 1°C every time the altitude increases 220 m. – 4000 m: 0°C to 35°C l Operating relative humidity: 5% RH to 95% RH (noncondensing) l Storage temperature: -40°C to +70°C l Storage altitude: < 5000 m l Storage relative humidity: 5% RH to 95% RH (noncondensing)

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

2 Installation Procedure

2

Installation Procedure

Installation Procedure Figure 2-1 shows the switch installation flowchart.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

2 Installation Procedure

Figure 2-1 Installation flowchart

Start Prepare for installation

Unpack the switch

Install the switch

Install modules

Connect the switch Complete postinstallation checking Power on the switch

End

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

3 Preparing for Installation

3

Preparing for Installation

About This Chapter 3.1 Reading the Safety Precautions 3.2 Checking the Installation Site 3.3 Checking the Cabinet/Rack 3.4 Checking the Power Distribution Environment 3.5 Preparing Installation Tools and Accessories

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

3 Preparing for Installation

3.1 Reading the Safety Precautions Read and follow all the safety cautions and instructions on the chassis or described in this document to ensure personal and equipment safety during installation, operation, and maintenance. NOTICE, CAUTION, and DANGER items in this document do not cover all the safety precautions and are only supplementary to general safety precautions. Installation and maintenance personnel must be trained to perform operations correctly and safely.

General Safety Guidelines

DANGER In case of fire, immediately leave the building or equipment deployment site and press the fire alarm button or call the fire department. Never enter the building on fire again in any situation.

CAUTION l Before performing any operation on a switch, wear ESD clothing and ESD gloves or an ESD wrist strap. Remove conductive objects like jewelry and watch to avoid electric shock or burn. l After installing the switch on a cabinet/rack, connect the ground cable to the chassis before any operations on the chassis and remove the ground cable only after you remove all the other components and cables from the chassis.

Environmental Safety

DANGER Do not place or operate the switch in an environment with flammable or explosive gases or smoke.

CAUTION l Keep the switch away from water or dampness to prevent damages to circuits. l The switch heats up during operation. The installation site must be well ventilated to ensure normal operation of the switch.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

3 Preparing for Installation

Electrical Safety

DANGER l Direct contact with a high-voltage power source or indirect contact through damp objects can be fatal. Misoperations on high-voltage facilities may result in fire, electric shock, or other accidents. l Never install or remove the switch or power cables while the power is on. The electric arc or spark generated between a power cable and conductor may cause fire or eye damage. l To protect personal and equipment safety, ground the switch before powering it on.

Laser Safety

CAUTION l Invisible laser beams will cause eye damage. Do not look into open optical ports without eye protection. l After unplugging an optical fiber, cover the fiber connectors with dust caps.

Mechanical Safety

CAUTION l Wear gloves to protect your hands from sharp edges when you are moving the chassis. l Before carrying a heavy object, use appropriate tools to protect yourself from bruises or sprains. l Before pulling the chassis out of the cabinet/rack, check whether there are any unstable or heavy objects on the cabinet. Be careful not to make the objects fall, which may cause bodily injury. l Do not drill holes on a cabinet without permission. Unqualified holes on a cabinet affect the electromagnetic filter performance of the cabinet and cause damages to the cables in the cabinet. In addition, metal scraps may fall into the cabinet when you are drilling holes, causing short circuits on printed circuit boards (PCBs).

3.2 Checking the Installation Site Checking the Site Temperature, Humidity, and Altitude The S9300&S9300E series switches are used indoors. Ensure that the temperature, humidity, and altitude in the installation site meet the following requirements: Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

8

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

3 Preparing for Installation

l

The switches must be installed in a clean, dry, well ventilated site with a stable temperature. The installation site must be free from leaking or dripping water, heavy dew, and humidity.

l

Dustproof measures must be taken at the site. Dust will cause electrostatic discharges on the chassis and affect connections of metal connectors and joints. This shortens the service life and may cause failures of the switches.

l

The temperature and humidity at the site must be within acceptable ranges. For the operating temperature and relative humidity ranges required by the S9300&S9300E series switches, see 1 Switches Overview. If the relative humidity exceeds 70%, use dehumidifiers or air conditioners with dehumidification features.

l

There must be no acidic, alkaline, or other corrosive gases at the installation site.

l

Keep the switches away from direct sunlight.

l

Leave at least 50 mm clearance at the two sides and rear of the switch for heat dissipation.

Measuring the Ground Resistance

NOTICE l Do not measure the ground resistance immediately after a rain. l The ground resistance in the equipment room should be lower than 1 ohm. In special cases, the ground resistance should be no more than 5 ohms (no more than 10 ohms in an area with high soil resistivity). l The current probe and voltage probe of the ground resistance tester must be vertical to a power line or an underground metal pipe. Use a ground resistance tester to measure the ground resistance. Figure 3-1 shows how to place the current and voltage probes of the tester. Figure 3-1 Positions of the current and voltage probes Ground grid Voltage probe

Current probe

d2 d1 D

Pay attention to the following points when measuring the ground resistance: l

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

The distance between the current probe and edge of the ground grid is d1, which is 4 to 5 times the maximum diagonal length (D) of the ground grid. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

9

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

3 Preparing for Installation

l

The distance between the voltage probe and edge of the ground grid is d2, which is 50% to 60% of d1.

l

Move the voltage probe along the line between the ground grid and current probe three times, over a certain distance (5% of d1) each time. If the resistance values obtained in the three movements are similar, the ground resistance is normal. NOTE

If the current probe cannot be placed over a distance of d1 away from the ground grid, change the distance in this way: In an area with equal soil resistivity, take 2D instead of d1 and take D instead of d2. In an area with unequal soil resistivity, take 3D instead of d1 and take 1.7D instead of d2.

3.3 Checking the Cabinet/Rack The S9300&S9300E series switches can be installed in a standard 19-inch cabinet/rack. Table 3-1 describes the requirements for a cabinet. Table 3-1 Requirements on the cabinet/rack for S9300&S9300E installation Model

Required Height

Required Depth

Other Requirements

S9303&S9303E

≥5U

≥ 600 mm

l A cabinet with posts in the middle is not recommended because the posts reduce the number of cables allowed in the cabinet/rack. l There must be guide rails or a tray in the cabinet to support the chassis. l It is recommended that the distance from the front mounting rails to the interior side of the front door (distance a) be 68 mm, 95 mm, 100 mm, or 193 mm. The distance from the card panels with cables connected to the interior

S9306&S9306E

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

≥ 11 U

NOTE When a 600-mm deep cabinet is used, ensure that the cabinet doors are single-swing doors.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

10

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

3 Preparing for Installation

Model

Required Height

S9312&S9312E

≥ 16 U

Required Depth

Other Requirements side of the front door must be larger than or equal to 110 mm. Otherwise, the number of cables allowed on the switch may be reduced or the front door may be unable to be closed.

Huawei offers N66E and N68E cabinets for the S9300&S9300E series switches. Table 3-2 lists the physical parameters of the cabinets. Figure 3-2 shows an N66E cabinet, and Figure 3-3 shows an N68E cabinet. Table 3-2 Physical parameters of N66E and N68E cabinets

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Model

Dimensions

Height

Distance a (from the Front Mounting Rails to the Interior Side of the Front Door)

N66E

600 mm x 600 mm x 2200 mm (W x D x H)

46 U

95 mm by default and can be adjusted to 68 mm or 193 mm

N68E

600 mm x 800 mm x 2200 mm (W x D x H)

46 U

100 mm by default and can be adjusted to 68 mm or 193 mm

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

11

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

3 Preparing for Installation

Figure 3-2 N66E cabinet

600mm Rear mounting rail

2200mm

Front mounting rail

a

600mm

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

12

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

3 Preparing for Installation

Figure 3-3 N68E cabinet Rear mounting rail

600mm

2200mm

Front mounting rail

a

800mm

3.4 Checking the Power Distribution Environment 3.4.1 DC Power Supply Power Supply Configuration Without Power Distribution Boxes Table 3-3 lists the DC power modules applicable to the S9300 series switches and configurations of the DC power modules.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

13

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

3 Preparing for Installation

Table 3-3 DC power modules and configurations for the S9300 series switches Device Model

Maximum Power Consumption of Chassis

Power Module

System Power Module Configuration

PoE Power Module Configuration (Applicable Only to V200R006C00 and Later Versions)

S9303

1000 W

1600 W DC power module

1+0, 1+1 (recommended )

Inapplicable in PoE power slots

2200 W DC power module

1+0, 1+1 (recommended )

1+0

2400 W DC power module

1+0, 1+1 (recommended )

Inapplicable in PoE power slots

1600 W DC power module

1+0, 1+1 (recommended )

Inapplicable in PoE power slots

2200 W DC power module

1+0, 1+1 (recommended ), 2+0, 2+1, 2+2

1+0, 1+1, 2+0, 2+1, 2+2, 3+0, 3+1, 4+0

2400 W DC power module

1+0, 1+1 (recommended )

Inapplicable in PoE power slots

1600 W DC power module

1+0, 1+1 (recommended )

Inapplicable in PoE power slots

2200 W DC power module

1+0, 1+1, 2+0, 2+1 (recommended) , 2+2

1+0, 1+1, 2+0, 2+1, 2+2, 3+0, 3+1, 4+0

2400 W DC power module

1+0, 1+1 (recommended )

Inapplicable in PoE power slots

S9306

S9312

2200 W

4200 W

Table 3-4 lists the DC power modules applicable to the S9300E series switches and configurations of the DC power modules.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

14

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

3 Preparing for Installation

Table 3-4 DC power modules and configurations for the S9300E series switches Device Model

Maximum Power Consumption of Chassis

Power Module

Power Module Configuration

S9303E

1100 W

2200 W DC power module

1+0, 1+1 (recommended)

2400 W DC power module

1+0, 1+1 (recommended)

2200 W DC power module

1+0, 1+1, 2+0, 2+1 (recommended), 2+2

2400 W DC power module

1+0, 1+1 (recommended)

2200 W DC power module

1+0, 1+1, 2+0, 2+1, 2+2, 3+0, 3+1 (recommended), 3+3, 4+0, 4+1

2400 W DC power module

1+0, 1+1 (recommended)

S9306E

S9312E

2400 W

4500 W

The following figures show the full configurations of power modules in a switch. NOTE

l If the PoE function is not required or supported, you do not need to configure PoE power modules or the matching power distribution boxes. Determine the number of PoE power modules according to your needs. l In versions earlier than V200R006C00, only 800 W and 2200 W AC power modules can be used as PoE power modules. In V200R006C00 and later versions, 2200 W DC power modules, 800 W AC power modules, and 2200 W AC power modules can all be used as PoE power modules.

l

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

As shown in Figure 3-4: –

Two system power modules of the S9300&S9300E work in 1+1 redundancy mode.

–

In V200R006C00 and later versions, one 2200 W DC PoE power module on the S9300 works in 1+0 mode.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

15

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

3 Preparing for Installation

Figure 3-4 1+1 redundancy of power modules DC PDF

Circuit breaker A

Circuit breaker B

Circuit breaker C

l

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Switch

Line a

Line b

Line c

DC power module 1

DC power module 2

2200W DC PoE power module

Figure 3-5 shows the 2+2 redundancy of power modules. –

Two system power modules of the S9300&S9300E work in 2+2 redundancy mode.

–

In V200R006C00 and later versions, one 2200 W DC PoE power module on the S9300 works in 2+2 mode.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

16

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

3 Preparing for Installation

Figure 3-5 2+2 redundancy of power modules

DC PDF

Circuit breaker A

Line a

Circuit breaker B

Line b

Circuit breaker C

Line c

Circuit breaker D

Line d

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

DC power module 1

DC power module 2

DC power module 3

DC power module 4

Circuit breaker E

Line e

2200W DC PoE power module 1

Circuit breaker F

Line f

2200W DC PoE power module 2

Circuit breaker G

Line g

2200W DC PoE power module 3

Line h

2200W DC PoE power module 4

Circuit breaker H l

Switch

(Only for S9312E) Figure 3-6 shows the 3+3 redundancy of power modules.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

17

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

3 Preparing for Installation

Figure 3-6 3+3 redundancy of power modules DC PDF

Switch

DC power module 1 Circuit breaker A

Line a

Circuit breaker B

Line b

Circuit breaker C

Line c

DC power module 2

DC power module 3

DC power module 4 Circuit breaker D

Line d

Circuit breaker E

Line e

Circuit breaker F

Line f

DC power module 5

DC power module 6

Table 3-5 describes the requirements for DC power distribution Table 3-5 Requirements for DC power distribution

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Power Module

Technica l Specifica tions

Power Cable CrossSectional Area

Maximu m Power Supply Distance

Number of Inputs

Circuit Breaker Rated Current

Output Terminal Type on Power Distribut ion Device

1600 W DC power module

l Rated input voltage : -48 V DC/-60 V DC l Input voltage

6 mm2

11 m

Two -48 V/-60 V inputs

The required rated current varies on different product models:

OT terminals or cord end terminals. To use other types of terminals,

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

18

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

Power Module

2200 W DC power module

2400 W DC power module

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

3 Preparing for Installation

Technica l Specifica tions

Power Cable CrossSectional Area

Maximu m Power Supply Distance

range: -38.4 V DC to -72 V DC l Maxim um input current : 40 A l Maxim um output current : 40 A

16 mm2

29 m

l Rated input voltage : -48 V DC/-60 V DC l Input voltage range: -40 V DC to -72 V DC l Maxim um input current : 60 A l Maxim um output current : 42 A

10 mm2

14 m

16 mm2

23 m

25 mm2

36 m

l Rated input voltage

10 mm2

14 m

Number of Inputs

Circuit Breaker Rated Current

Output Terminal Type on Power Distribut ion Device

l S9303: ≥ 20 A l S9306 &S931 2: ≥ 40 A

purchase the terminals and prepare cables onsite.

Equal to the number of power modules

≥ 63 A

JG terminals or cord end terminals. To use other types of terminals, purchase the terminals and prepare cables onsite.

Two -48 V/-60 V inputs

≥ 60 A

OT terminals or cord end

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

19

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

Power Module

3 Preparing for Installation

Technica l Specifica tions

Power Cable CrossSectional Area

Maximu m Power Supply Distance

: -48 V DC/-60 V DC l Input voltage range: -38.4 V DC to -72 V DC l Maxim um input current : 60 A l Maxim um output current : 60 A

16 mm2

23 m

Number of Inputs

Circuit Breaker Rated Current

Output Terminal Type on Power Distribut ion Device terminals. To use other types of terminals, purchase the terminals and prepare cables onsite.

NOTE

l Select appropriate power cables according to the power supply distances. If the required power supply distance exceeds the maximum power supply distance, use power distribution boxes. The power supply distance is the cable length between the power distribution frame and power modules. l To use the N+N redundancy mode, equally divide the power modules into two groups and connect the two groups of power modules to two independent power supply systems. This configuration provides redundancy of power supply systems to enhance system reliability.

Power Supply Configuration with Power Distribution Boxes Table 3-6 lists the DC power modules applicable to the S9300 series switches and configurations of the DC power modules.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

20

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

3 Preparing for Installation

Table 3-6 DC power modules and configurations for the S9300 series switches Device Model

Maximum Power Consumpti on of Chassis

Power Distributio n Box

Power Module

System Power Module Configurat ion

PoE Power Module Configurat ion (Applicabl e Only to V200R006C 00 and Later Versions)

S9303

1000 W

1600 W DC power distribution box

1600 W DC power module

1+0, 1+1 (recommen ded)

Inapplicable in PoE power slots

2200 W DC power distribution box

2200 W DC power module

1+0, 1+1 (recommen ded)

1+0

2200 W DC power distribution box

2400 W DC power module

1+0, 1+1 (recommen ded)

Inapplicable in PoE power slots

1600 W DC power distribution box

1600 W DC power module

1+0, 1+1 (recommen ded)

Inapplicable in PoE power slots

2200 W DC power distribution box

2200 W DC power module

1+0, 1+1 (recommen ded), 2+0, 2+1, 2+2

1+0, 1+1, 2+0, 2+1, 2+2, 3+0, 3+1, 4+0

2200 W DC power distribution box

2400 W DC power module

1+0, 1+1 (recommen ded)

Inapplicable in PoE power slots

1600 W DC power distribution box

1600 W DC power module

1+0, 1+1 (recommen ded)

Inapplicable in PoE power slots

2200 W DC power distribution box

2200 W DC power module

1+0, 1+1, 2+0, 2+1 (recommend ed), 2+2

1+0, 1+1, 2+0, 2+1, 2+2, 3+0, 3+1, 4+0

S9306

S9312

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

2200 W

4200 W

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

21

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

Device Model

Maximum Power Consumpti on of Chassis

3 Preparing for Installation

Power Distributio n Box

Power Module

System Power Module Configurat ion

PoE Power Module Configurat ion (Applicabl e Only to V200R006C 00 and Later Versions)

2200 W DC power distribution box

2400 W DC power module

1+0, 1+1 (recommen ded)

Inapplicable in PoE power slots

Table 3-7 lists the DC power modules applicable to the S9300E series switches and configurations of the DC power modules. Table 3-7 DC power modules and configurations for the S9300E series switches Device Model

Maximum Power Consumption of Chassis

Power Distribution Box

Power Module

Power Module Configuration

S9303E

1100 W

2200 W DC power distribution box

2200 W DC power module

1+0, 1+1 (recommended )

2200 W DC power distribution box

2400 W DC power module

1+0, 1+1 (recommended )

2200 W DC power distribution box

2200 W DC power module

1+0, 1+1, 2+0, 2+1 (recommended) , 2+2

2200 W DC power distribution box

2400 W DC power module

1+0, 1+1 (recommended )

2200 W DC power distribution box

2200 W DC power module

1+0, 1+1, 2+0, 2+1, 2+2, 3+0, 3+1 (recommended) , 3+3, 4+0, 4+1

2200 W DC power distribution box

2400 W DC power module

1+0, 1+1 (recommended )

S9306E

S9312E

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

2400 W

4500 W

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

22

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

3 Preparing for Installation

The following figures show the full configurations of power modules in a switch. NOTE

l If more than one power module is installed in a switch, you can connect the power modules to the same power source or different power sources. It is recommended that you connect the power modules to different power sources to improve power reliability. l If the PoE function is not required or supported, you do not need to configure PoE power modules or the matching power distribution boxes. Determine the number of PoE power modules according to your needs. l In versions earlier than V200R006C00, only 800 W and 2200 W AC power modules can be used as PoE power modules. In V200R006C00 and later versions, 2200 W DC power modules, 800 W AC power modules, and 2200 W AC power modules can all be used as PoE power modules.

l

As shown in Figure 3-7: –

When a 1600 W DC power distribution is used, two system power modules of the S9300 work in 1+1 redundancy mode.

–

In V200R006C00 and later versions, one 2200 W DC PoE power module on the S9300 works in 1+0 mode.

Figure 3-7 1600 W DC power distribution box and 1+1 redundancy of DC power modules (different power sources) Cabinet 1600 W DC power distribution box Circuit breaker A2

DC PDF Circuit breaker A1

DC power module 1

Line a Circuit breaker B1

Switch

Circuit breaker B2 DC power module 2

Line b

Circuit breaker C2

Circuit breaker C1

2200 W DC PoE power module

Line c

2200 W DC power distribution box

As shown in Figure 3-8:

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

–

When a 1600 W DC power distribution is used, two system power modules of the S9300 work in 1+1 redundancy mode. If a single power input can provide the maximum power required by the switch connected to the power distribution box, the two power modules can connect to the same power source.

–

1+0 configuration of 2200 W DC PoE power module on the S9300 in V200R006C00 and later versions Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

23

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

3 Preparing for Installation

Figure 3-8 1600 W DC power distribution box and 1+1 redundancy of DC power modules (same power source) Cabinet

1600 W DC power distribution box

DC PDF

Switch

Circuit breaker A2

Circuit breaker A1

DC power module 1

Line a Circuit breaker B2

Circuit breaker B1

DC power module 2

Line b Circuit breaker C2

Circuit breaker C1

2200 W DC PoE power module

Line c

2200 W DC power distribution box Short-circuiting bar

l

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

As shown in Figure 3-9: –

When a 2200 W DC power distribution is used, two system power modules of the S9300&S9300E work in 1+1 redundancy mode.

–

In V200R006C00 and later versions, one 2200 W DC PoE power module on the S9300 works in 1+0 mode.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

24

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

3 Preparing for Installation

Figure 3-9 2200 W DC power distribution box and 1+1 redundancy of DC power modules (different power sources) Cabinet DC PDF

2200 W DC power distribution box 1

Circuit breaker A

Circuit breaker A1

Switch

DC power module 1 Line a

Circuit breaker B

Circuit breaker B1 DC power module 2

Line b

Circuit breaker C1

Circuit breaker C

2200 W DC PoE power module

Line c

2200 W DC power distribution box 2 l

As shown in Figure 3-10: –

When a 2200 W DC power distribution is used, two system power modules of the S9300&S9300E work in 1+1 redundancy mode. If the equipment room does not have many power sources but has 126 A circuit breakers, the two power modules can be connected to the same power source. The power input line can be split into two in the power distribution box using a short-circuiting bar.

–

In V200R006C00 and later versions, one 2200 W DC PoE power module on the S9300 works in 1+0 mode. NOTE

l To use a single power input for the two power modules, ensure that the rated current of the circuit breaker connected to the power modules is larger than 126 A and the circuit breaker must be connected to a 35 mm2 power cable. l Redundant input and output terminals on the power distribution box can be left for future use.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

25

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

3 Preparing for Installation

Figure 3-10 2200 W DC power distribution box and 1+1 redundancy of DC power modules (same power source) Cabinet 2200 W DC power distribution box

DC PDF Circuit breaker A

Switch

Circuit breaker A1 Line a

Circuit breaker B

Circuit breaker A2

DC power module 1

Circuit breaker B1

DC power module 2

Line b

2200 W DC PoE power module

Short-circuiting bar

l

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

As shown in Figure 3-11: –

When a 2200 W DC power distribution is used, four system power modules of the S9300&S9300E work in 2+2 redundancy mode.

–

In V200R006C00 and later versions, four 2200 W DC PoE power modules on the S9300 work in 2+2 redundancy mode.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

26

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

3 Preparing for Installation

Figure 3-11 2200 W DC power distribution box and 2+2 redundancy of DC power modules (different power sources) Cabinet 2200 W DC power distribution box

DC PDF Circuit breaker A Circuit breaker B Circuit breaker C Circuit breaker D

Circuit breaker A1 Line a Circuit breaker B1

DC power module 1

Line b Circuit breaker C1

DC power module 2

Circuit breaker D1

2200 W DC PoE power module 1

Line c Line d

Circuit breaker E Line e Circuit breaker F Line f

Circuit breaker E1 Circuit breaker F1

2200 W DC PoE power module 2 DC power module 3

DC power module 4

Circuit breaker G Line g Circuit breaker H Line h

l

Switch

Circuit breaker G1 Circuit breaker H1

2200 W DC PoE power module 3 2200 W DC PoE power module 4

As shown in Figure 3-12: –

When a 2200 W DC power distribution is used, four system power modules of the S9300&S9300E work in 2+2 redundancy mode. If the equipment room does not have many power sources but has 126 A circuit breakers, the power modules can be connected to the same power source. The power input line can be split into two in the power distribution box using a short-circuiting bar.

–

In V200R006C00 and later versions, four 2200 W DC PoE power modules on the S9300 work in 2+2 redundancy mode. NOTE

l To use a single power input for the two power modules, ensure that the rated current of the circuit breaker connected to the power modules is larger than 126 A and the circuit breaker must be connected to a 35 mm2 power cable. l Redundant input and output terminals on the power distribution box can be left for future use.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

27

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

3 Preparing for Installation

Figure 3-12 2200 W DC power distribution box and 2+2 redundancy of DC power modules (same power source) Cabinet 2200 W DC power distribution box

DC PDF Circuit breaker A

Switch

Circuit breaker A1 Line a

Circuit breaker B

Circuit breaker A2 Circuit breaker B1

Line b Circuit breaker C

Circuit breaker B2 Circuit breaker C1

Line c Circuit breaker D

Circuit breaker C2 Circuit breaker D1

Line d

Circuit breaker D2

DC power module 1 DC power module 2 2200 W DC PoE power module 1 2200 W DC PoE power module 2 DC power module 3 DC power module 4 2200 W DC PoE power module 3 2200 W DC PoE power module 4

Short-circuiting bar

l

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

(Only for S9312E) Figure 3-13 shows the power distribution system with a 2200 W DC power distribution box and 3+3 redundancy of DC power modules.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

28

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

3 Preparing for Installation

Figure 3-13 2200 W DC power distribution boxes and 3+3 redundancy of DC power modules Cabinet 2200 W DC power distribution box

DC PDF

Switch

Circuit breaker A1

Circuit breaker A Circuit breaker B

Line a

Circuit breaker B1

DC power module 1

Circuit breaker C

Line b

Circuit breaker C1

DC power module 2 DC power module 3

Line c Circuit breaker D

Circuit breaker D1

Circuit breaker E

Line d

Circuit breaker E1

Circuit breaker F

Line e

Circuit breaker F1

DC power module 4

DC power module 5

DC power module 6

Line f

Generally, the internal power cables between power distribution boxes and cabinets are installed beforehand. The external power cables between power distribution boxes and power distribution frames need to be installed onsite. Table 3-8 describes requirements for external power cables. Table 3-8 Requirements for external power cables

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Power Module

Technical Specificati ons

Power Cable CrossSectional Area

Maximum Power Supply Distance (Circuit Breaker Rated Current)

Number of Inputs

Output Termina l Type on Power Distribu tion Device

2200 W DC power module

l Rated input voltage: -48 V DC/-60 V DC

16 mm2

18 m (≥ 63 A)

25 mm2

29 m (≥ 63 A)

Equal to the number of power modules

OT terminals or cord end terminals. To use other

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

29

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

Power Module

1600 W DC power module

2400 W DC power module

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

3 Preparing for Installation

Technical Specificati ons

Power Cable CrossSectional Area

Maximum Power Supply Distance (Circuit Breaker Rated Current)

l Input voltage range: -40 V DC to -72 V DC l Maximu m input current: 60 A l Maximu m output current: 42 A

35 mm2

l 41 m (≥ 63 A)

l Rated input voltage: -48 V DC/-60 V DC l Input voltage range: -38.4 V DC to -72 V DC l Maximu m input current: 40 A l Maximu m output current: 40 A

16 mm2

14 m (≥ 80 A)

25 mm2

23 m (≥ 80 A)

35 mm2

32 m (≥ 80 A)

l Rated input voltage: -48 V

16 mm2

18 m (≥ 63 A)

25 mm2

29 m (≥ 63 A)

Number of Inputs

types of terminals, purchase the terminals and prepare cables onsite.

l 20 m (≥ 126 A)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Output Termina l Type on Power Distribu tion Device

Two -48 V/-60 V inputs

Equal to the number of power modules

30

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

Power Module

3 Preparing for Installation

Technical Specificati ons

Power Cable CrossSectional Area

Maximum Power Supply Distance (Circuit Breaker Rated Current)

DC/-60 V DC l Input voltage range: -38.4 V DC to -72 V DC l Maximu m input current: 60 A l Maximu m output current: 60 A

35 mm2

41 m (≥ 63 A)

Number of Inputs

Output Termina l Type on Power Distribu tion Device

NOTE

To use the N+N redundancy mode, equally divide the power modules into two groups and connect the two groups of power modules to two independent power supply systems. This configuration provides redundancy of power supply systems to enhance system reliability.

Use of a 1600 W DC Power Distribution Box Figure 3-14 shows how a 1600 W DC power distribution box is connected to power modules in an S9306 chassis when the power modules work in 1+1 redundancy and require inputs from different power sources.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

31

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

3 Preparing for Installation

Figure 3-14 Use of a 1600 W DC power distribution box for 1+1 redundancy of power modules in an S9306 chassis DC PDF

1600 W DC power distribution box -48V1 -48VA NEG1(-)

SWa

SW1

BGND SW2

-48VB SWb

-48V1 BGND -48V2

NEG2(-)

SW3

-48V2 BGND

RTNA

SW4 RTN1(+)

BGND -48V3 -48V3

RTNB

RTN2(+)

BGND BGND -48V4

PGND

-48V4 BGND BGND

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

32

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

3 Preparing for Installation

Use of a 2200 W DC Power Distribution Box Figure 3-15 shows how a 2200 W DC power distribution box is connected to power modules in an S9306 chassis when the power modules work in 1+1 redundancy and require inputs from different power sources. Figure 3-15 Use of a 2200 W DC power distribution box for 1+1 redundancy of power modules in an S9306 chassis 2200 W DC power distribution box

DC PDF A1SWa

NEG1(-) A1+ B1+ B1-

SWb

SW1

RTN1(+) RTN2(+) NEG2(-)

SW2

PGND

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

33

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

3 Preparing for Installation

3.4.2 AC Power Supply Power Supply Configuration Without Power Distribution Boxes Table 3-9 lists the AC power modules applicable to the S9300 series switches and configurations of the AC power modules. Table 3-9 AC power modules and configurations for the S9300 series switches Device Model

Maximum Power Consumption of Chassis

Power Module

System Power Module Configuration

PoE Power Module Configuration

S9303

1000 W (without PoE power supply)

800 W AC power module

1+0, 1+1 (recommended )

1+0

2200 W AC power module

1+0, 1+1 (recommended )

1+0

800 W AC power module

1+0, 1+1, 2+0, 2+1 (recommended) , 2+2

1+0, 1+1, 2+0, 2+1, 2+2, 3+0, 3+1, 4+0

2200 W AC power module

1+0, 1+1(recommen ded), 2+0, 2+1, 2+2

1+0, 1+1, 2+0, 2+1, 2+2, 3+0, 3+1, 4+0

800 W AC power module

1+0, 1+1, 2+0, 2+1 (recommended) , 2+2

1+0, 1+1, 2+0, 2+1, 2+2, 3+0, 3+1, 4+0

2200 W AC power module

1+0, 1+1, 2+0, 2+1 (recommended) , 2+2

1+0, 1+1, 2+0, 2+1, 2+2, 3+0, 3+1, 4+0

S9306

S9312

2200 W (without PoE power supply)

4200 W (without PoE power supply)

Table 3-10 lists the AC power modules applicable to the S9300E series switches and configurations of the AC power modules.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

34

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

3 Preparing for Installation

Table 3-10 AC power modules and configurations for the S9300E series switches Device Model

Maximum Power Consumption of Chassis

Power Module

Power Module Configuration

S9303E

1100 W

800 W AC power module

1+0, 1+1 (recommended)

2200 W AC power module

1+0, 1+1 (recommended), 2+0

800 W AC power module

1+0, 1+1, 2+0, 2+1, 2+2, 3+0, 3+1 (recommended), 4+0

2200 W AC power module

1+0, 1+1, 2+0, 2+1 (recommended), 2+2, 3+0, 3+1, 4+0

800 W AC power module

1+0, 1+1, 2+0, 2+1, 2+2, 3+0, 3+1, 3+3, 4+0, 4+1, 5+0, 5+1 (recommended), 6+0

2200 W AC power module

1+0, 1+1, 2+0, 2+1, 2+2, 3+0, 3+1 (recommended), 3+3, 4+0, 4+1, 5+0, 5+1, 6+0

S9306E

S9312E

2400 W

4500 W

The following figures show the full configurations of power modules in a switch. NOTE

l If more than one power module is installed in a switch, you can connect the power modules to the same power source or different power sources. It is recommended that you connect the power modules to different power sources to improve power reliability. l If the PoE function is not required or supported, you do not need to configure PoE power modules or the matching power distribution boxes. Determine the number of PoE power modules according to your needs. l In versions earlier than V200R006C00, only 800 W and 2200 W AC power modules can be used as PoE power modules. In V200R006C00 and later versions, 2200 W DC power modules, 800 W AC power modules, and 2200 W AC power modules can all be used as PoE power modules.

l

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Figure 3-16 shows the 1+1 redundancy of system power modules and 1+0 configuration of PoE power module in a switch.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

35

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

3 Preparing for Installation

Figure 3-16 1+1 redundancy of power modules AC power strip

l

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Switch

Circuit breaker A

Line a

Circuit breaker B

Line b

Circuit breaker C

Line c

AC power module 1

AC power module 2

PoE AC power module

Figure 3-17 shows the 2+2 redundancy of system power modules and 2+2 configuration of PoE power module in a switch.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

36

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

3 Preparing for Installation

Figure 3-17 2+2 redundancy of power modules Switch

AC power strip

Circuit breaker A

l

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Line a

Circuit breaker B

Line b

Circuit breaker C

Line c

Circuit breaker D

Line d

Circuit breaker E

Line e

Circuit breaker F

Line f

Circuit breaker G

Line g

Circuit breaker H

Line h

AC power module 1

AC power module 2

AC power module 3

AC power module 4

PoE power module 1

PoE power module 2

PoE power module 3

PoE power module 4

(Only for S9312E) Figure 3-18 shows the 3+3 redundancy of power modules.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

37

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

3 Preparing for Installation

Figure 3-18 3+3 redundancy of power modules

Switch

AC power strip

Circuit breaker A

Line a

Circuit breaker B

Line b

Circuit breaker C

Line c

Circuit breaker D

Line d

Circuit breaker E

Line e

Circuit breaker F

Line f

AC power module 1

AC power module 2

AC power module 3

AC power module 4

AC power module 5

AC power module 6

Table 3-11 describes the requirements for AC power distribution. Table 3-11 Requirements for AC power distribution

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Power Module

Power Cable Connector Type

Maximum Power Supply Distance

Number of Inputs

Circuit Breaker Rated Current

Output Terminal Type on Power Distributio n Device

800 W AC power module

C13 straight female

3m

Equal to the number of power modules

≥5A

AC socket complying with the local standard. To use OT terminals or cord end terminals, make power cables onsite.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

38

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

3 Preparing for Installation

Power Module

Power Cable Connector Type

Maximum Power Supply Distance

Number of Inputs

Circuit Breaker Rated Current

Output Terminal Type on Power Distributio n Device

2200 W AC power module

C19 straight female

3m

Equal to the number of power modules

≥ 15.5 A

AC socket complying with the local standard. To use OT terminals or cord end terminals, make power cables onsite.

NOTE

l For 800 W power modules, select the power cables with the maximum current of larger than or equal to 10 A. For 2200 W power modules, select the power cables with the maximum current of larger than or equal to 16 A. l Each AC power module must be connected to an independent circuit breaker. NOTE

l Select appropriate power cables according to the power supply distances. If the required power supply distance exceeds the maximum power supply distance, use power distribution boxes. The power supply distance is the cable length between the power distribution frame and power module. l To use the N+N redundancy mode, equally divide the power modules into two groups and connect the two groups of power modules to two independent power supply systems. This configuration provides redundancy of power supply systems to enhance system reliability. l An 800 W AC power module provides a maximum output power of 800 W when the input voltage is 220 V. When the input voltage is 110 V, the maximum output power reduces to 400 W. l A 2200 W AC power module provides a maximum output power of 2200 W when the input voltage is 220 V. When the input voltage is 110 V, the maximum output power reduces to 1100 W. l An 800 W power module may not provide sufficient power for a chassis if the input voltage is 110 V. In this case, use a 2200 W AC power module as the system power module.

Power Supply Configuration with Power Distribution Boxes Table 3-12 lists the AC power modules applicable to the S9300 series switches and configurations of the AC power modules.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

39

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

3 Preparing for Installation

Table 3-12 AC power modules and configurations for the S9300 series switches Device Model

Maxim um Power Consu mption of Chassis

Power Distribution Box

Power Module

System Power Module Configurati on

PoE Power Module Configurati on

S9303

1000 W (without PoE power supply)

800 W AC power distribution box

800 W AC power module

1+0, 1+1 (recommend ed)

1+0

2200 W AC power distribution box

2200 W AC power module

1+0, 1+1 (recommend ed)

1+0

2200 W (without PoE power supply)

800 W AC power distribution box

800 W AC power module

1+0, 1+1, 2+0, 2+1 (recommende d), 2+2

1+0, 1+1, 2+0, 2+1, 2+2, 3+0, 3+1, 4+0

2200 W AC power distribution box

2200 W AC power module

1+0, 1+1 (recommend ed), 2+0, 2+1, 2+2

1+0, 1+1, 2+0, 2+1, 2+2, 3+0, 3+1, 4+0

4200 W (without PoE power supply)

800 W AC power distribution box

800 W AC power module

1+0, 1+1, 2+0, 2+1 (recommende d), 2+2

1+0, 1+1, 2+0, 2+1, 2+2, 3+0, 3+1, 4+0

2200 W AC power distribution box

2200 W AC power module

1+0, 1+1, 2+0, 2+1 (recommende d), 2+2

1+0, 1+1, 2+0, 2+1, 2+2, 3+0, 3+1, 4+0

S9306

S9312

Table 3-13 lists the AC power modules applicable to the S9300E series switches and configurations of the AC power modules.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

40

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

3 Preparing for Installation

Table 3-13 AC power modules and configurations for the S9300E series switches Device Model

Maxim um Power Consu mption of Chassis

Power Distribution Box

Power Module

Power Module Configuration

S9303E

1100 W

800 W AC power distribution box

800 W AC power module

1+0, 1+1 (recommended)

2200 W AC power distribution box

2200 W AC power module

1+0, 1+1 (recommended), 2+0

800 W AC power distribution box

800 W AC power module

1+0, 1+1, 2+0, 2+1, 2+2, 3+0, 3+1 (recommended), 4+0

2200 W AC power distribution box

2200 W AC power module

1+0, 1+1, 2+0, 2+1 (recommended), 2+2, 3+0, 3+1, 4+0

800 W AC power distribution box

800 W AC power module

1+0, 1+1, 2+0, 2+1, 2+2, 3+0, 3+1, 3+3, 4+0, 4+1, 5+0, 5+1 (recommended), 6+0

2200 W AC power distribution box

2200 W AC power module

1+0, 1+1, 2+0, 2+1, 2+2, 3+0, 3+1 (recommended), 3+3, 4+0, 4+1, 5+0, 5+1, 6+0

S9306E

S9312E

2400 W

4500 W

The following figures show the full configurations of power modules in a switch. NOTE

l If more than one power module is installed in a switch, you can connect the power modules to the same power source or different power sources. It is recommended that you connect the power modules to different power sources to improve power reliability. l If the PoE function is not required or supported, you do not need to configure PoE power modules or the matching power distribution boxes. Determine the number of PoE power modules according to your needs. l In versions earlier than V200R006C00, only 800 W and 2200 W AC power modules can be used as PoE power modules. In V200R006C00 and later versions, 2200 W DC power modules, 800 W AC power modules, and 2200 W AC power modules can all be used as PoE power modules.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

41

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

l

3 Preparing for Installation

Figure 3-19 shows the power distribution system with 800 W AC power distribution boxes, 1+1 redundancy of system power modules connected to different power sources, and 1+0 configuration of PoE power module. Figure 3-19 800 W AC power distribution boxes, 1+1 redundancy of system power modules, and 1+0 configuration of PoE power module (different power sources) Cabinet 800 W AC power distribution box 1

AC PDF

Circuit breaker A

Line a

Circuit breaker A1

Switch AC power module 1

800W AC power distribution box 2

Circuit breaker B

Line b

Circuit breaker B1

AC power module 2

2200 W AC power distribution box

Circuit breaker C

l

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Line c

Circuit breaker C1

PoE power module

Figure 3-20 shows the power distribution system with an 800 W AC power distribution box, 1+1 redundancy of system power modules connected to the same power source, and 1+0 configuration of PoE power module.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

42

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

3 Preparing for Installation

Figure 3-20 800 W AC power distribution box, 1+1 redundancy of system power modules, and 1+0 configuration of PoE power module (same power source) Cabinet 800 W AC power distribution box

AC PDF

Circuit breaker A

Line a

Circuit breaker A1 Circuit breaker A2

Switch AC power module 1

AC power module 2

2200 W AC power distribution box

Circuit breaker B

l

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Line b

Circuit breaker B1

PoE power module

Figure 3-21 shows the power distribution system with 2200 W AC power distribution boxes, 1+1 redundancy of system power modules connected to different power sources, and 1+0 configuration of PoE power module.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

43

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

3 Preparing for Installation

Figure 3-21 2200 W AC power distribution boxes, 1+1 redundancy of system power modules, and 1+0 configuration of PoE power module (different power sources) Cabinet 2200 W AC power distribution box 1

AC PDF

Circuit breaker A

Line a

Circuit breaker A1

Circuit breaker B

Line b

Circuit breaker B1

Switch AC power module 1

AC power module 2

2200 W AC power distribution box 2

Circuit breaker C

l

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Line c

Circuit breaker C1

PoE power module

Figure 3-22 shows the power distribution system with 2200 W AC power distribution boxes, 1+1 redundancy of system power modules connected to the same power source, and 1+0 configuration of PoE power module.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

44

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

3 Preparing for Installation

Figure 3-22 2200 W AC power distribution box, 1+1 redundancy of system power modules, and 1+0 configuration of PoE power module (same power source)

Cabinet 2200 W AC power distribution box1

AC PDF

Circuit breaker A

Line a

Circuit breaker A1 Circuit breaker A2

AC power module 1

AC power module 2 Switch

2200 W AC power distribution box2

Circuit breaker B

Line b

Circuit breaker B1

PoE power module

Short-circuiting bar l

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Figure 3-23 shows the power distribution system with 800 W AC power distribution boxes, 2+2 redundancy of system power modules connected to different power sources, and 2+2 redundancy of PoE power modules.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

45

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

3 Preparing for Installation

Figure 3-23 800 W AC power distribution boxes, 2+2 redundancy configuration of system power modules, and 2+2 redundancy of PoE power modules (different power sources) Cabinet

800 W AC power distribution box 1

AC PDF

Circuit breaker A

Line a

Circuit breaker A1 Circuit breaker A2

Switch AC power module 1

AC power module 2

800 W AC power distribution box 2 Line b Circuit breaker B1

Circuit breaker B

Circuit breaker B2

AC power module 3

AC power module 4

2200 W AC power distribution box

Circuit breaker C

Line c

Circuit breaker C1

Circuit breaker C2 Circuit breaker D

Line d

Circuit breaker D1 Circuit breaker D2

PoE power module 1 PoE power module 2 PoE power module 3 PoE power module 4

Short-circuiting bar

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

46

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

3 Preparing for Installation

Cabinet

800 W AC power distribution box 1

AC PDF

Circuit breaker A

Line a

Circuit breaker A1 Circuit breaker A2

Switch AC power module 1

AC power module 2

800 W AC power distribution box 2 Line b Circuit breaker B

Circuit breaker B1 Circuit breaker B2

l

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

AC power module 3

AC power module 4

Figure 3-24 shows the power distribution system with an 800 W AC power distribution box, 2+2 redundancy of system power modules connected to the same power source, and 2+2 redundancy of PoE power modules.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

47

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

3 Preparing for Installation

Figure 3-24 800 W AC power distribution box, 2+2 redundancy of system power modules, and 2+2 redundancy of PoE power modules (same power source) Cabinet 800 W AC power distribution box

AC PDF

Circuit breaker A

Line a

Circuit breaker A1

Switch AC power module 1

AC power module 2 Circuit breaker A2 Circuit breaker A3 Circuit breaker A4

AC power module 3

AC power module 4

2200 W AC power distribution box

Circuit breaker B

Line b

Circuit breaker B1 Circuit breaker B2

Circuit breaker C

Line c

Circuit breaker C1 Circuit breaker C2

PoE power module 1 PoE power module 2 PoE power module 3 PoE power module 4

Short-circuiting bar

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

48

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

3 Preparing for Installation

Cabinet 800 W AC power distribution box

AC PDF

Circuit breaker A

Line a

Circuit breaker A1

Switch AC power module 1

AC power module 2 Circuit breaker A2 Circuit breaker A3 Circuit breaker A4

l

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

AC power module 3

AC power module 4

Figure 3-25 shows the power distribution system with 2200 W AC power distribution boxes, 2+2 redundancy of system power modules connected to different power sources, and 2+2 redundancy of PoE power modules.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

49

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

3 Preparing for Installation

Figure 3-25 2200 W AC power distribution boxes, 2+2 redundancy of system power modules, and 2+2 redundancy of PoE power modules (different power sources) Cabinet 2200 W AC power distribution box 1

AC PDF

Circuit breaker A

Line a

Circuit breaker A1 Circuit breaker A2

Circuit breaker B

Line b

Circuit breaker B1 Circuit breaker B2

Switch AC power module 1

AC power module 2

AC power module 3

AC power module 4

2200 W AC power distribution box 2

Circuit breaker C

Line c

Circuit breaker C1

Circuit breaker C2 Circuit breaker D

Line d

Circuit breaker D1 Circuit breaker D2

PoE power module 1 PoE power module 2 PoE power module 3 PoE power module 4

Short-circuiting bar

l

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Figure 3-26 shows the power distribution system with 800 W AC power distribution boxes and 3+3 redundancy of AC power modules.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

50

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

3 Preparing for Installation

Figure 3-26 800 W AC power distribution boxes and 3+3 redundancy of AC power modules Cabinet 800 W AC power distribution box 1

AC PDF

Circuit breaker A

Line a

Circuit breaker A1 Circuit breaker A2 Circuit breaker A3

Switch AC power module 1

AC power module 2

AC power module 3

800 W AC power distribution box 2

Circuit breaker B

Line b

Circuit breaker B1 Circuit breaker B2 Circuit breaker B3

AC power module 4 AC power module 5 AC power module 6

Short-circuiting bar

l

(Only for S9312E) Figure 3-27 shows the power distribution system with 2200 W AC power distribution boxes and 3+3 redundancy of AC power modules.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

51

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

3 Preparing for Installation

Figure 3-27 2200 W AC power distribution boxes and 3+3 redundancy of AC power modules Cabinet 2200 W AC power distribution box 1

AC PDF

Circuit breaker A

Line a

Circuit breaker A1 Circuit breaker A2

Circuit breaker B

Line b

Circuit breaker B1

Switch AC power module 1

AC power module 2

AC power module 3

2200 W AC power distribution box 2

Circuit breaker C

Line c

Circuit breaker C1 Circuit breaker C2

Circuit breaker D

Line d

Circuit breaker D1

AC power module 4

AC power module 5

AC power module 6

Short-circuiting bar

Generally, the internal power cables between power distribution boxes and cabinets are installed beforehand. The external power cables between power distribution boxes and power distribution frames need to be installed onsite. Table 3-14 describes requirements for external power cables.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

52

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

3 Preparing for Installation

Table 3-14 Requirements for external power cables Power Module

Power Cable CrossSectional Area

Maximum Power Supply Distance

Circuit Breaker Rated Current

Numbe r of Inputs

Output Termin al Type on Power Distrib ution Device

800 W AC power module

16 mm2

25 m

Determined by the power of the device connected to the power distribution box

Determi ned by the power capacity of each line in the equipme nt room and number of power modules used in the switch.

OT terminals or cord end terminals . To use other types of terminals , purchase the terminals and prepare cables onsite.

Each 800 W AC power distributi on box requires one power input and provides eight power outputs. 2200 W AC power module

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

6 mm2

26 m

≥16 A or 32 A

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Determi ned by the power capacity of each line in the equipme nt room and

OT terminals or cord end terminals . To use other types of terminals , purchase

53

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

Power Module

3 Preparing for Installation

Power Cable CrossSectional Area

Maximum Power Supply Distance

16 mm2

71 m

Circuit Breaker Rated Current

Numbe r of Inputs

Output Termin al Type on Power Distrib ution Device

number of power modules used in the switch. Each 2200 W AC power distributi on box requires four power input lines when it is fully loaded.

the terminals and prepare cables onsite.

NOTICE Each AC power module must be connected to an independent circuit breaker. NOTE

l An 800 W AC power module provides a maximum output power of 800 W when the input voltage is 220 V. When the input voltage is 110 V, the maximum output power reduces to 400 W. l To use the N+N redundancy mode, equally divide the power modules into two groups and connect the two groups of power modules to two independent power supply systems. This configuration provides redundancy of power supply systems to enhance system reliability. l A 2200 W AC power module provides a maximum output power of 2200 W when the input voltage is 220 V. When the input voltage is 110 V, the maximum output power reduces to 1100 W. l An 800 W power module may not provide sufficient power for a chassis if the input voltage is 110 V. In this case, use a 2200 W AC power module as the system power module.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

54

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

3 Preparing for Installation

Use of an 800 W AC Power Distribution Box Figure 3-28 shows how an 800 W AC power distribution box is connected to system power modules in an S9306 chassis when the power modules work in 1+1 redundancy and require inputs from different power sources.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

55

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

3 Preparing for Installation

Figure 3-28 Use of an 800 W AC power distribution box for 1+1 redundancy of power modules in an S9306 chassis

800 W AC power distribution box Output area

Switches OO UU T T Input SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 SW5 SW6 SW7 SW8 PP area U U T T

O U T P U T

O U T P U T

OO UU T T P P UU T T

OO UU T T P P UU T T

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

2200W AC power distribution box Area A Area B Switches Switches SW1 SW2 SW1 SW2

Input area

O U T P U T 1

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

O U T P U T 2

O U T P U T 1

O U T P U T

Input area

2

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

56

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

3 Preparing for Installation

Use of a 2200 W AC Power Distribution Box Figure 3-29 how a 2200 W AC power distribution box is connected to power modules in an S9306 chassis when the power modules work in 1+1 redundancy and require inputs from different power sources.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

57

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

3 Preparing for Installation

Figure 3-29 Use of a 2200 W AC power distribution box for 1+1 redundancy of power modules in an S9306 chassis

Area A

2200 W AC power distribution box 1 Switches Switches

Area B

SW1 SW2 SW1 SW2

Input area

O U T P U T 1

Area A

O U T P U T 2

O U T P U T 1

O U T P U T

Input area

2

2200 W AC power distribution box 2 Switches Switches

Area B

SW1 SW2 SW1 SW2

Input area

O U T P U T 1

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

O U T P U T 2

O U T P U T 1

O U T P U T

Input area

2

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

58

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

3 Preparing for Installation

3.5 Preparing Installation Tools and Accessories Table 3-15 shows the tools required for installing a switch. Table 3-15 Installation tools

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Tool

Description

Protectiv e gloves

Used to prevent electrostatic discharges.

ESD gloves

Used to protect hands during operation.

ESD wrist strap

Used to prevent electrostatic discharges. Wear the strap on your wrist and insert the other end into the ESD jack on the cabinet.

Utility knife

Used to cut cartons or paper.

Scissors

Used to cut the installation template.

Picture

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

59

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Tool

Description

Tweezers

Used to remove optical fibers or network cables.

Measurin g tape

Used to measure distances.

Marker

Used to mark component installation positions.

Flat-head screwdri ver

Used to tighten or loosen screws and bolts with a slotted head.

Phillips screwdri ver

Used to tighten or loosen screws and bolts with a cross head.

Diagonal pliers

Used to cut insulation tubes and cable ties.

Adjustab le wrench

Used to tighten or loosen hex or square bolts and nuts. The span can be adjusted to suit bolts or nuts in different sizes.

3 Preparing for Installation

Picture

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

60

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

Tool

Description

Needlenose pliers

Used raise locking bars on a crate.

Network cable tester

Used to test network cable connectivity.

Multimet er

Used to test cabinet insulation, cable connectivity, and device electrical performance indicators, including voltage, current, and resistance.

3 Preparing for Installation

Picture

Table 3-16 shows the installation accessories required for installing a switch. Table 3-16 Installation accessories

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Tool

Description

Insulatio n tape

Used to insulate power wires or other conductors.

Picture

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

61

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

Tool

Description

Corrugat ed pipe

Used to protect optical fibers.

3 Preparing for Installation

Picture

Table 3-17 lists the installation accessories delivered with a switch. Table 3-17 Installation accessories

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Accessory

Quantity

Description

Part Number

Cable tie (150 x 3.6 mm)

50

Used to bundle cables.

21100015

Cable tie (300 x 3.6 mm)

50

Used to bundle cables.

21100144

Tweezers

1 pair

Used to install or remove optical fibers on optical ports.

63120166

Signal cable label

5

Used to identify locations of signal cables.

29041060

Power cable label

1

Used to identify the location of the power cable.

29041061

ESD wrist strap

1

Prevents ESD damages when you touch or operate the equipment or components.

28050001

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

62

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

3 Preparing for Installation

Accessory

Quantity

Description

Part Number

Fiber binding tape

1m

Used to bundle optical fibers.

21101258

Serial cable

1

Used to connect the console port of the switch to a serial port of a maintenance terminal for local commissioni ng or maintenance of the switch.

04051113

Power cable

1

Receives power from an external power supply system to power the switch.

04046941

Ground cable

1

Used to ground the switch.

04150842

Removable handle

2

Used to move the switch.

21240209

Panel screw (M6X12)

l S9303& S9303E :8

Used to fix the switch.

26020141

NOTE The S9303 and S9303E switches do not have removable handles.

l S9306& S9306E : 12 l S9312& S9312E : 15

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

63

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

Accessory

Quantity

Description

Part Number

Floating nut (M6)

l S9303& S9303E :8

Installed on mounting rails of a cabinet/rack and used with M6 screws to secure the switch in the cabinet/rack.

26020075

l S9306& S9306E : 12 l S9312& S9312E : 15

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

3 Preparing for Installation

Quick Installation Guide

1

Used to guide equipment installation.

31507393

Warranty card

1

Warranty of repair service.

31110018

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

64

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

4 Unpacking a Switch

4

Unpacking a Switch

About This Chapter 4.1 Unpacking a Crate 4.2 Unpacking a Carton 4.3 Unpacking a Card

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

65

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

4 Unpacking a Switch

4.1 Unpacking a Crate Context Crates are used to package goods such as cabinets and S9312&S9312E switches. A crate is secured with steel locking bars and has foam materials in it to protect the product. When equipment is delivered, unpack the crate and check the equipment and accessories in the crate.

NOTICE l Do not turn a crate upside down; otherwise, the equipment in the crate will be damaged. l Wear gloves or take other protective measures to prevent hand injuries when unpacking a crate. NOTE

Before unpacking a crate, move it to or close to the installation site (equipment room for example). Do not transport the unpacked equipment over a long distance.

Tools l

Flat-head screwdriver

l

Needle-nose pliers

l

Protective gloves

Procedure Step 1 Inspect the crate. If the crate is delivered upside down, the crate is wet, or the label on the crate is damaged, analyze the cause and contact the equipment supplier immediately. If no exceptions are found, start unpacking the crate. Step 2 Raise all the locking bars on the cover of the crate. Insert a flat-head screwdriver (or a claw hammer or a pair of needle-nose pliers) into the hole on a locking bar and raise the flat-head screwdriver to raise the locking bar. Locking bar

Step 3 Open the crate cover and remove it.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

66

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

4 Unpacking a Switch

Step 4 Raise the locking bars on the side panels of the crate and remove the side panels.

Step 5 Remove the foam materials, move the equipment out of the crate, and inspect the equipment. If rust or other damage is found on the equipment, analyze the cause and contact the equipment supplier immediately. ----End

4.2 Unpacking a Carton Context Cartons are used to package S9303&S9306 and S9303E&S9306E switches, and cables, cards, power modules, or other modules.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

67

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

4 Unpacking a Switch

NOTICE l When cutting the pressure-sensitive adhesive tape on a carton, do not insert the utility knife too deep; otherwise, the utility knife may cut the components in the carton. l Wear gloves or take other protection measures to prevent hand injuries when unpacking a carton. NOTE

Before unpacking a carton, move it to or close to the installation site (equipment room for example). Do not transport the unpacked equipment over a long distance.

Tools l

Utility knife

l

Diagonal pliers

l

Protective gloves

l

Adjustable wrench

l

Phillips screwdriver

Procedure Step 1 Inspect the carton. If the carton is wet, or the label on the carton is damaged, analyze the cause and contact the equipment supplier immediately. If no exception is found, go to the next step. Step 2 Check the label on the carton to learn about the type and number of components in the carton. Step 3 Open the carton. 1.

Cut the strapping band with diagonal pliers. See callout 1 in Figure 4-1.

2.

Cut the pressure-sensitive adhesive tape with a utility knife. See callout 2 in Figure 4-1.

3.

Open the carton and remove the foam materials. See callout 3 in Figure 4-1.

4.

Take out the device or component from the carton. If a switch is in the carton, lift the switch out of the carton by its handles.

Figure 4-1 Unpacking other cartons Strapping band

(1) Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Pressure-sensitive adhesive tape

(2) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Foam material

(3) 68

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

4 Unpacking a Switch

Step 4 Check whether the number of components on the packing list is the same as the number marked on the carton. If so, take out the components. Step 5 Check the components. If any problem is found, contact the equipment supplier immediately. ----End

4.3 Unpacking a Card Context A card is packed in an ESD bag, which is placed in a carton with foam materials.

NOTICE l Electronic devices are vulnerable to electrostatic discharges (ESD). Before touching a card, wear ESD gloves or an ESD wrist strap (with the other end in an ESD jack). Do not touch electronic components on the card. l If a card is moved from a cold, dry place to a warm, humid place, wait more than 30 minutes before unpacking the card. Otherwise, moisture accumulated on the card surfaces will damage the card. NOTE

The desiccant in an ESD bag can keep items in the ESD bag dry.

Tools l

ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves

l

Utility knife

Procedure Step 1 Inspect the carton of the card. If any damage is found on the carton, or the label on the carton is damaged, contact the equipment supplier immediately. If the package is intact, go to the next step. Step 2 Wear ESD gloves or an ESD wrist strap (with the other end inserted in an ESD jack). Step 3 Open the carton. 1.

Cut the pressure-sensitive adhesive tape with a utility knife. See callout 1 in Figure 4-2.

2.

Open the carton and remove the foam materials. See callout 2 in Figure 4-2.

3.

Open the ESD bag and take out the card. See callout 3 in Figure 4-2.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

69

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

4 Unpacking a Switch

Figure 4-2 Unpacking a card

Pressure-sensitive adhesive tape

(1)

Foam material

(2)

(3)

Step 4 Check the card. If any damage is found on the card, analyze the cause and contact the equipment supplier immediately. ----End

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

70

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

5 Installing Switches

5

Installing Switches

About This Chapter 5.1 Installing S9303&S9303E Chassis 5.2 Installing S9306&S9306E Chassis 5.3 Installing S9312&S9312E Chassis

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

71

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

5 Installing Switches

5.1 Installing S9303&S9303E Chassis Context

NOTICE l Do not block the air intake vent (on the left side) and air exhaust vent (at the rear) on the chassis. Leave 70 mm to 90 mm clearance to ensure effective heat dissipation. l Do not move or lift a switch by the top edges of the chassis as this may distort the chassis. l When installing a switch, ensure that the chassis bottom is completely attached to the guide rails or tray in the cabinet or rack. NOTE

l Place the tweezers delivered with the chassis in the cabinet or rack. You may need to use the tweezers to remove optical fibers or network cables during equipment maintenance. l The methods for installing the S9303 and S9303E chassis are the same. This section uses S9303E as an example to describe the installation procedure.

Tools and Accessories l

Scissors

l

Flat-head screwdriver

l

Phillips screwdriver

l

Marker

l

Installation template

l

Floating nuts and matching screws

l

Guide rails and matching screws (separately purchased)

Procedure Step 1 Install mounting brackets. Measure the distance a from the front mounting rails to the interior side of the front door (see 3.3 Checking the Cabinet/Rack), and then install mounting brackets to the switch based on the mapping between distance a and mounting bracket installation positions. Table 5-1 Mapping between distance a and mounting bracket installation positions Distance a

Mounting Bracket Installation Position

68 mm

See Figure 5-1.

l 95 mm

See Figure 5-2.

l 100 mm 193 mm Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

See Figure 5-3. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

72

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

5 Installing Switches

Figure 5-1 Mounting bracket installation position (a = 68 mm)

8-M3

≤25kg(55Ib)

Figure 5-2 Mounting bracket installation position (a = 95 mm or a = 100 mm)

8-M3

≤25kg(55Ib)

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

73

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

5 Installing Switches

Figure 5-3 Mounting bracket installation position (a = 193 mm)

8-M3

≤25kg(55Ib)

Step 2 Mark mounting holes on the mounting rails. 1.

Use a pair of scissors to cut off the installation template along the cutting line for the S9303&S9303E chassis. See Figure 5-4 Figure 5-4 Cutting off the installation template 03 mounting hole 1 06 mounting hole 1

03 mounting hole 3 06 mounting hole 5 12 mounting hole 7

12 mounting hole 2

12 mounting hole 8

03 mounting hole 2 06 mounting hole 2

03 mounting hole 4 06 mounting hole 6

03 guide rail

03 guide rail

06 mounting hole 3

06 mounting hole 7

12 mounting hole 3

12 mounting hole 9

12 mounting hole 4

12 mounting hole 10

06 mounting hole 4

06 mounting hole 8

06 guide rail

06 guide rail

12 mounting hole 5

12 mounting hole 11

12 mounting hole 6

12 mounting hole 12

12 guide rail

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Quick Installation Guide Note: This quick installation guide is also the installation template.

12 mounting hole 1

12 guide rail

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

74

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

2.

5 Installing Switches

Locate the four mounting holes to be used. Determine the chassis installation position in the cabinet, use the installation template to locate four mounting holes, and use a marker to mark these mounting holes. See Figure 5-5. NOTE

–

The installation height of a chassis must be a multiple of 1 U (including 1 U).

–

1 U equals 1.75 inch (44.45 mm). U is a unit of height defined in International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) 60297.

Figure 5-5 Locating mounting holes

Install floating nuts 03 mounting hole 1 06 mounting hole 1

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Quick Installation Guide Note: This quick installation guide is also the installation template.

03 mounting hole 3 06 mounting hole 5

12 mounting hole 1

12 mounting hole 7

12 mounting hole 2

12 mounting hole 8

03 mounting hole 2 06 mounting hole 2

03 mounting hole 4 06 mounting hole 6

Narrow Wide 1U

Guide rail bottom

Wide

Guide rail bottom ≥1U

3.

Remove the installation template.

Step 3 Install the floating nuts and guide rails. 1.

Use a flat-head screwdriver to install four floating nuts in the marked mounting holes. See callout 1 in Figure 5-6.

2.

Secure the guide rails in the marked position with screws. See callout 2 in Figure 5-6.

NOTICE If no guide rails are available, use a tray instead.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

75

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

5 Installing Switches

Figure 5-6 Securing the guide rails

1

2

M5 Step 4 Install the chassis in the cabinet. 1.

Two persons lift the chassis onto the guide rails from the front door, and then slowly push the chassis into the cabinet along the guide rails. See callout 1 in Figure 5-7.

2.

Use screws to secure the chassis to the cabinet. See callout 2 in Figure 5-7.

Figure 5-7 Installing the chassis in the cabinet

1 M6

2 ≤25

kg（55

lb）

P W R 1

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

P W R 2

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

76

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

5 Installing Switches

Step 5 Connect the ground cable. The methods for connecting the OT and JG terminals are different. Select a method according to the ground cable type. l

Figure 5-8 shows how to connect the OT terminal.

l

Figure 5-9 shows how to connect the JG terminal.

Figure 5-8 Connecting the ground cable (OT terminal)

Hazardous and other

Ϲ⽕೼

moving parts, keeping fingers body parts away.

亢᠛ᮟ

䕀ᯊ᥹

㾺৊⠛

ʽ

RUN/ALM

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

77

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

5 Installing Switches

Figure 5-9 Connecting the ground cable (JG terminal)

Hazardous and other

Ϲ⽕೼

moving parts, keeping fingers body parts away.

亢᠛ᮟ

䕀ᯊ᥹

㾺৊⠛

ʽ

RUN/ALM

----End

5.2 Installing S9306&S9306E Chassis Prerequisites

NOTICE l Do not block the air intake vent (on the left side) and air exhaust vent (at the rear) on the chassis. Leave 70 mm to 90 mm clearance to ensure effective heat dissipation. l Do not move or lift a switch by the top edges of the chassis as this may distort the chassis. l When installing a switch, ensure that the chassis bottom is completely attached to the guide rails or tray in the cabinet or rack. NOTE

l Place the tweezers delivered with the chassis in the cabinet or rack. You may need to use the tweezers to remove optical fibers or network cables during equipment maintenance. l The methods for installing the S9306 and S9306E chassis are the same. This section uses S9306E as an example to describe the installation procedure.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

78

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

5 Installing Switches

Tools and Accessories l

Scissors

l

Flat-head screwdriver

l

Phillips screwdriver

l

Marker

l

Installation template

l

Floating nuts and matching screws

l

Guide rails and matching screws (separately purchased)

l

Removable handles

Procedure Step 1 Install mounting brackets. Measure the distance a from the front mounting rails to the interior side of the front door (see 3.3 Checking the Cabinet/Rack), and then install mounting brackets to the switch based on the mapping between distance a and mounting bracket installation positions. Table 5-2 Mapping between distance a and mounting bracket installation positions Distance a

Mounting Bracket Installation Position

68 mm

See Figure 5-10.

l 95 mm

See Figure 5-11.

l 100 mm 193 mm

See Figure 5-12.

Figure 5-10 Mounting bracket installation position (a = 68 mm)

14-M3

≤45kg(99Ib)

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

79

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

5 Installing Switches

Figure 5-11 Mounting bracket installation position (a = 95 mm or a = 100 mm)

14-M3

≤45kg(99Ib)

Figure 5-12 Mounting bracket installation position (a = 193 mm)

14-M3

≤45kg(99Ib)

Step 2 Mark mounting holes on the mounting rails. 1.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Use a pair of scissors to cut off the installation template along the cutting line for the S9306&S9306E chassis. See Figure 5-13.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

80

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

5 Installing Switches

Figure 5-13 Cutting off the installation template 03 mounting hole 1 06 mounting hole 1

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Quick Installation Guide Note: This quick installation guide is also the installation template.

03 mounting hole 3 06 mounting hole 5

12 mounting hole 1

12 mounting hole 7

12 mounting hole 2

12 mounting hole 8

03 mounting hole 2 06 mounting hole 2

03 mounting hole 4 06 mounting hole 6

03 guide rail

03 guide rail

06 mounting hole 3

06 mounting hole 7

12 mounting hole 3

12 mounting hole 9

12 mounting hole 4

12 mounting hole 10

06 mounting hole 4

06 mounting hole 8

06 guide rail

06 guide rail

12 mounting hole 5

12 mounting hole 11

12 mounting hole 6

12 mounting hole 12

12 guide rail

2.

12 guide rail

Determine the chassis installation position in the cabinet, use the installation template to locate eight mounting holes, and use a marker to mark these mounting holes. See Figure 5-14. NOTE

–

The installation height of a chassis must be a multiple of 1 U (including 1 U).

–

1 U equals 1.75 inch (44.45 mm). U is a unit of height defined in International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) 60297.

Figure 5-14 Locating mounting holes Install floating nuts 03 mounting hole 1 06 mounting hole 1

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Quick Installation Guide Note: This quick installation guide is also the installation template.

03 mounting hole 3 06 mounting hole 5

12 mounting hole 1

12 mounting hole 7

12 mounting hole 2

12 mounting hole 8

03 mounting hole 2 06 mounting hole 2

03 mounting hole 4 06 mounting hole 6

03 guide rail

03 guide rail

Narrow Wide 06 mounting hole 3

06 mounting hole 7

12 mounting hole 3

12 mounting hole 9

12 mounting hole 4

12 mounting hole 10

06 mounting hole 4

06 mounting hole 8

06 guide rail

06 guide rail

Guide rail bottom

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

1U

Wide

≥1U

Guide rail bottom

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

81

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

3.

5 Installing Switches

Remove the installation template.

Step 3 Install the floating nuts and guide rails. 1.

Use a flat-head screwdriver to install eight floating nuts in the marked mounting holes. See callout 1 in Figure 5-15.

2.

Secure the guide rails in the marked position with screws. See callout 2 in Figure 5-15.

NOTICE If no guide rails are available, use a tray instead.

Figure 5-15 Securing the guide rails

1

2

M5 Step 4 Install the chassis in the cabinet. 1.

Install the removable handles on two sides of the chassis. Two persons lift the chassis using the handles several times to verify that the handles are installed correctly. See callout 1 in Figure 5-16.

2.

Two persons lift the chassis onto the guide rails from the front door and slowly push the chassis into one third of the cabinet depth. Hold the chassis while removing the removable handles. Then push the chassis completely in the cabinet. See callout 2 in Figure 5-16.

3.

Use screws to secure the chassis to the cabinet. See callout 3 in Figure 5-16.

4.

Hang the handles on the handle slots at rear of the chassis. See callout 4 in Figure 5-16.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

82

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

5 Installing Switches

Figure 5-16 Installing the chassis in the cabinet

4

2 1

M6

3

CMU PWR4 PWR3 PWR2 PWR1

≤45

kg（99

lb）

1

2

Step 5 Connect the ground cable. ----End

5.3 Installing S9312&S9312E Chassis Prerequisites

NOTICE l Do not block the air intake vent (on the left side) and air exhaust vent (at the rear) on the chassis. Leave 70 mm to 90 mm clearance to ensure effective heat dissipation. l Do not move or lift a switch by the top edges of the chassis as this may distort the chassis. l When installing a switch, ensure that the chassis bottom is completely attached to the guide rails or tray in the cabinet or rack. NOTE

l Place the tweezers delivered with the chassis in the cabinet or rack. You may need to use the tweezers to remove optical fibers or network cables during equipment maintenance. l The methods for installing the S9312 and S9312E chassis are the same. This section uses S9312E as an example to describe the installation procedure.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

83

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

5 Installing Switches

Tools and Accessories l

Scissors

l

Flat-head screwdriver

l

Phillips screwdriver

l

Marker

l

Installation template

l

Floating nuts and matching screws

l

Guide rails and matching screws (separately purchased)

l

Removable handles

Procedure Step 1 Install mounting brackets. Measure the distance a from the front mounting rails to the interior side of the front door (see 3.3 Checking the Cabinet/Rack), and then install mounting brackets to the switch based on the mapping between distance a and mounting bracket installation positions. Table 5-3 Mapping between distance a and mounting bracket installation positions Distance a

Mounting Bracket Installation Position

68 mm

See Figure 5-17.

l 95 mm

See Figure 5-18.

l 100 mm 193 mm

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

See Figure 5-19.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

84

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

5 Installing Switches

Figure 5-17 Mounting bracket installation position (a = 68 mm)

18-M3

OR

≤75kg(165Ib)

Figure 5-18 Mounting bracket installation position (a = 95 mm or a = 100 mm)

18-M3

OR

≤75kg(165Ib)

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

85

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

5 Installing Switches

Figure 5-19 Mounting bracket installation position (a = 193 mm)

18-M3

OR

≤75kg(165Ib)

Step 2 Mark mounting holes on the mounting rails. 1.

Determine the chassis installation position in the cabinet, use the installation template for the S9312&S9312E to locate 12 mounting holes, and use a marker to mark these mounting holes. See Figure 5-20. NOTE

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

–

The installation height of a chassis must be a multiple of 1 U (including 1 U).

–

1 U equals 1.75 inch (44.45 mm). U is a unit of height defined in International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) 60297.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

86

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

5 Installing Switches

Figure 5-20 Locating mounting holes Install floating nuts 03 mounting hole 1 06 mounting hole 1

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Quick Installation Guide Note: This quick installation guide is also the installation template.

03 mounting hole 3 06 mounting hole 5

12 mounting hole 1

12 mounting hole 7

12 mounting hole 2

12 mounting hole 8

03 mounting hole 2 06 mounting hole 2

03 mounting hole 4 06 mounting hole 6

03 guide rail

03 guide rail

06 mounting hole 3

06 mounting hole 7

12 mounting hole 3

12 mounting hole 9

12 mounting hole 4

12 mounting hole 10

06 mounting hole 4

06 mounting hole 8

06 guide rail

Narrow

06 guide rail

Wide 1U

Wide 12 mounting hole 5

12 mounting hole 11

12 mounting hole 6

12 mounting hole 12

12 guide rail

12 guide rail

Guide rail bottom

2.

≥1U

Guide rail bottom

Remove the installation template.

Step 3 Install the floating nuts and guide rails. 1.

Use a flat-head screwdriver to install 12 floating nuts in the marked mounting holes. See callout 1 in Figure 5-21.

2.

Secure the guide rails in the marked position with screws. See callout 2 in Figure 5-21.

NOTICE If no guide rails are available, use a tray instead.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

87

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

5 Installing Switches

Figure 5-21 Securing the guide rails

1

2

M5 Step 4 Install the chassis in the cabinet. 1.

Install the removable handles on two sides of the chassis. Two persons lift the chassis using the handles several times to verify that the handles are installed correctly. See callout 1 in Figure 5-22.

2.

Three persons lift the chassis onto the guide rails from the front door and slowly push the chassis into one third of the cabinet depth. Hold the chassis while removing the removable handles. Then push the chassis completely in the cabinet. See callout 2 in Figure 5-22.

3.

Use screws to secure the chassis to the cabinet. See callout 3 in Figure 5-22.

4.

Hang the handles on the handle slots at rear of the chassis. See callout 4 in Figure 5-22.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

88

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

5 Installing Switches

Figure 5-22 Installing the chassis in the cabinet

4

2 M6

1 3

PWR6 PWR5 CMU PWR4 PWR3 PWR2 PWR1

≤75

kg（165

lb）

1

2

Step 5 Connect the ground cable. ----End

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

89

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

6 Installing Modules

6

Installing Modules

About This Chapter 6.1 Installing a Power Module 6.2 (Optional) Installing a CSS Subcard or an Enhanced Flexible Service Subcard 6.3 (Optional) Installing a CKM Daughter Card 6.4 Installing a Card 6.5 Installing Cable Management Frames

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

90

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

6 Installing Modules

6.1 Installing a Power Module Context

NOTICE l AC and DC power modules cannot be installed in the same type of power module slots on a switch (system or PoE power module slots). Power modules with different power values cannot be installed in the same type of power module slots either. l In versions earlier than V200R006C00, only 800 W and 2200 W AC power modules can be used as PoE power modules. In V200R006C00 and later versions, 2200 W DC power modules, 800 W AC power modules, and 2200 W AC power modules can all be used as PoE power modules. l Only the S9300 supports 1600 W DC power modules. l Cover all the vacant slots with filler panels to ensure good electromagnetic shielding, heat dissipation, and dustproof performance.

Tools l

ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves

l

Phillips screwdriver

Procedure Step 1 Wear an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves. When wearing an ESD wrist strap, insert the other end in the ESD jack of a device and ensure that the device is reliably grounded. Step 2 (Optional) Remove the filler panel (if any) from the power module slot. Step 3 Install the power module into the power module slot. 1.

Raise the ejector lever. With one hand beneath the power module, use the other hand to grasp the panel and slowly slide the power module into the slot, until the hook on the ejector lever is attached to the interior side of the power module slot. See callout 1 in Figure 6-1.

2.

Lower the ejector lever to ensure that the power module is completely seated in the slot. See callout 2 of Figure 6-1.

3.

Use a Phillips screwdriver to tighten the captive screw on the ejector lever. See callout 3 in Figure 6-1.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

91

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

6 Installing Modules

Figure 6-1 Installing a power module

2 1 ON

RUN

3

ALM FAULT

OFF

PWR6 PWR5 CMU PWR4 PWR3 PWR2 PWR1

≤75

kg（165

lb）

ON ON ON

RUN

RUN

FAULT

FAULT

RUN ALM

ALM

ALM

FAULT

1

2

OFF

OFF

OFF

ON

RUN ALM FAULT

OFF

NOTE

This figure shows installation of an 800 W power module (on the S9312E) as an example.

Step 4 Install filler panels on all the vacant power module slots. ----End

6.2 (Optional) Installing a CSS Subcard or an Enhanced Flexible Service Subcard Context If a Cluster Switching System Service (CSS) subcard or an enhanced flexible service subcard is configured for a card, install the subcard on this card before you install the card in the chassis. For the S9300, CSS subcards or enhanced flexible service subcards are installed in subcard slots of MPUs. Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

92

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

6 Installing Modules

NOTICE l The CSS subcard and enhanced flexible service subcard are not hot swappable. l Handle a card slowly, gently and do not touch the electronic components on the card. NOTE

The methods for installing a CSS subcard and an enhanced flexible service subcard are the same. A S9300 CSS subcard is used as an example here.

Tools and Accessories l

ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves

l

Phillips screwdriver

l

50 cm x 50 cm ESD fabric

Procedure Step 1 Lay the ESD fabric on a desk or another flat surface. Use the ESD bag of a card as a substitute if no ESD fabric is available. Step 2 Wear an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves. When wearing an ESD wrist strap, insert the other end in the ESD jack of a device and ensure that the device is reliably grounded. Step 3 Take out the motherboard (such as an MPU) from the ESD bag and place the motherboard on the ESD fabric. Step 4 Install a CSS subcard. 1.

Take out the CSS subcard from the ESD bag. Hold the panel of the CSS subcard and slowly insert the CSS subcard into the subcard slot in the MPU. See callout 1 in Figure 6-2.

2.

Use a Phillips screwdriver to tighten the captive screws on the CSS subcard. See callout 2 in Figure 6-2.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

93

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

6 Installing Modules

Figure 6-2 Installing a CSS subcard

1

CSS ID

MASTER

1 2 3 4

5 6 7 8

1

2

ALM ACT RUN/

ETH CLK1

LINK

S0-1

1 2 3 4

CSS ID

MASTER

1 2 3 4

5 6 7 8

1

2

3

CLK2

CON

RUN/ALM

VSTS

4

----End

6.3 (Optional) Installing a CKM Daughter Card Context This section describes how to install a clock daughter card CKM on a motherboard.

NOTICE l You must install clock daughter cards on both the active and standby MPUs. l Take ESD protective measures when installing a clock daughter card.

Tools and Accessories l

ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves

l

Phillips screwdriver

l

50 cm x 50 cm ESD fabric

Procedure Step 1 Lay the ESD fabric on a desk or another flat surface. Use the ESD bag of a card as a substitute if no ESD fabric is available. Step 2 Wear an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves. When wearing an ESD wrist strap, insert the other end in the ESD jack of a device and ensure that the device is reliably grounded. Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

94

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

6 Installing Modules

Step 3 Take out the motherboard (MPU) from the ESD bag and place the motherboard on the ESD fabric. Step 4 Take out the clock daughter card from the ESD bag. Use a Phillips screwdriver to loosen the three screws on the clock daughter card, and then disassemble them into type-1 screws, long studs, short studs, and type-2 screws.

Type-1 screw Long stud

Short stud Type-2 screw Step 5 Install three studs on the motherboard. l

If the motherboard is a Main Control Unit (MCU), install the three short studs into holes M9, M10, and M11. Fasten the studs.

M10 M9

M11

l

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

If the motherboard is a Switch Routing Unit (SRU), install the three long studs into holes M8, M10, and M11. Secure the long studs with type-1 screws from back of the SRU.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

95

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

6 Installing Modules

Fasten the screws with the Phillips screwdriver.

M11

M8 M10

Step 6 Gently insert the connectors of the clock daughter card into the slots on the motherboard, and then use type-2 screws to secure the clock daughter card on the motherboard. Fasten the screws with the Phillips screwdriver.

----End

6.4 Installing a Card

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

96

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

6 Installing Modules

Context

NOTICE l Cover all the vacant slots with filler panels to ensure good electromagnetic shielding, heat dissipation, and dustproof performance. l Wear an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves when you install cards. Do not touch a card with bare hands. l When installing a card, push the card slowly and horizontally into a slot along guide rails in the slot to protect components on the cards from collisions. Ensure that the card is securely installed in the slot. NOTE

The following installation procedure applies to MPUs, LPUs.

Tools l

ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves

l

Phillips screwdriver

Procedure Step 1 Wear an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves. When wearing an ESD wrist strap, insert the other end in the ESD jack of a device and ensure that the device is reliably grounded. Step 2 Remove the filler panel from the slot and save the filler panel for later use. See Figure 6-3.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

97

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

6 Installing Modules

Figure 6-3 Removing a filler panel

2

1

PWR6 PWR5 CMU PWR4 PWR3 PWR2 PWR1

≤75

kg（165

lb）

ON ON ON ON

RUN

FAULT

RUN

FAULT

RUN

FAULT

RUN ALM

ALM

ALM

ALM

FAULT

1

2

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

Step 3 Take out the card from the ESD bag and rotate the ejector levers outward. With one hand beneath the card, use the other hand to grasp the panel of the card and slowly slide the card along the guide rails, until the hooks of the ejector levers are attached to the interior sides of the slot. See callout 1 in Figure 6-4.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

98

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

6 Installing Modules

Figure 6-4 Installing a card

1

2 CON CLK1

ETH ACT RUN/ALM

CLK2 RST

PWR6 PWR5 CMU PWR4 PWR3 PWR2 PWR1

≤75

kg（165

lb）

ON ON ON ON

RUN

FAULT

FAULT

RUN

RUN ALM

RUN

ALM FAULT

ALM

ALM

FAULT

1

2

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

Step 4 Rotate the ejector levers inward until the card is completed seated in the slot. See callout 2 in Figure 6-4. You will hear a click from the ejector levers when the card is completely seated in the slot. NOTE

A Centralized Monitoring Unit (CMU) has no ejector levers, and you can insert it directly into a CMU slot.

Step 5 (Only for a CMU) Use a Phillips screwdriver to tighten the captive screws on the panel. See Figure 6-5.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

99

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

6 Installing Modules

CLK1

ETH ACT RUN/ALM

CLK2 RST

CON CLK1

RS485

1 CON

ACT

RUN/ALM

Figure 6-5 Installing a CMU

ETH ACT RUN/ALM

CLK2

MON

RST

CMUA

PWR6 PWR5 CMU PWR4 PWR3 PWR2

2

kg（165

lb）

ON ON

ON ON

RUN

FAULT

RUN

FAULT

RUN

FAULT

RUN ALM

ALM

ALM

ALM

MON

RS485

ACT

≤75

RUN/ALM

PWR1

FAULT

1

2 CMUA

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

Step 6 Install filler panels on all the vacant slots. ----End

6.5 Installing Cable Management Frames Tools and Accessories l

ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves

l

Phillips screwdriver

l

Cable management frames and matching screws

Procedure Step 1 Take out the cable management frames and screws from the package. Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

100

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

6 Installing Modules

Step 2 Wear an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves. When wearing an ESD wrist strap, insert the other end in the ESD jack of a device and ensure that the device is reliably grounded. Step 3 Align positioning pins on a cable management frame with positioning holes on the chassis, hang the cable management frame in the positioning holes, and drag it downward to secure it on the chassis. See callout 1 in Figure 6-6. Step 4 Install all cable management frames in the same way, and then use a Phillips screwdriver to tighten all the screws. See callout 2 in Figure 6-6. Figure 6-6 Installing cable management frames

1 Positioning hole

Positioning pin

CON CLK1

ETH ACT RUN/ALM

CLK2

M4

RST

CON CLK1

ETH ACT RUN/ALM

CLK2 RST

2

PWR6 PWR5 CMU PWR4 PWR3

RS485

RS485

ACT

ACT

RUN/ALM

RUN/ALM

PWR2 PWR1

lb）

MON

kg（165

MON

≤75

CMUA ON ON ON ON

RUN

FAULT

RUN

FAULT

RUN

FAULT

CMUA

RUN ALM

ALM

ALM

ALM

FAULT

1

2

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

----End

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

101

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

7 Connecting Switches

7

Connecting Switches

About This Chapter 7.1 Connecting Power Cables 7.2 Connecting Network Cables 7.3 Connecting High-Speed Cables 7.4 Installing Optical Modules and Connecting Optical Fibers

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

102

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

7 Connecting Switches

7.1 Connecting Power Cables 7.1.1 Connecting DC Power Cables Context

DANGER l To avoid electric shock, do not connect or remove power cables while the power is on. l Insulate the power terminals and other exposed electrical parts. NOTE

l Attach labels to the power switches that will be used during the operation. l Attach warning labels to the power switches that cannot be used during the operation. l Check labels on the power cables to ensure that the cables are connected correctly.

Figure 7-1 shows the power cable connection and applicable power cable terminals when no power distribution box is used. Figure 7-1 Power cable connection without a power distribution box Switch

DC PDF

Circuit breaker

Power cable

DC power module

OT terminal OT or cord end terminal

Figure 7-2 shows the power cable connection and applicable power cable terminals when a 1600 W DC power distribution box is used.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

103

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

7 Connecting Switches

Figure 7-2 Power cable connection with a 1600 W DC power distribution box Cabinet 1600 W DC power distribution box

DC PDF

Circuit breaker A

Power cable 1

Circuit breaker A1

Switch

DC power module

Power cable 2

OT terminal Cord end terminal OT or cord end terminal

Figure 7-3 shows the power cable connection and applicable power cable terminals when a 2200 W DC power distribution box is used. Figure 7-3 Power cable connection with a 2200 W DC power distribution box

Cabinet 2200 W DC power distribution box

DC PDF

Circuit breaker A

Power cable 1

Circuit breaker A1

Power cable 2

Switch

DC power module

OT terminal Cord end terminal OT or cord end terminal

NOTE

l If the 2200 W DC power distribution box has four inputs and eight outputs, use short-circuiting bars to combine eight lines into four. Use M6 OT terminals as -48 V terminals and cord end terminals as RTN terminals. l If the 2200 W DC power distribution box has eight inputs and eight outputs, use cord end terminals as input terminals.

Tools and Accessories l

ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves

l

Phillips screwdriver

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

104

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

l

Diagonal pliers

l

Cable ties

l

Labels

7 Connecting Switches

Procedure Step 1 Turn off the power source to which the power cables need to be connected. Step 2 Measure the distance that the power cables will go through, and cut the DC power cables into an appropriate length based on the measured distance. Step 3 Identify positive and negative power cables, attach temporary labels to both ends of each power cable, and write numbers on the labels. For details on how to number the cables, see Engineering Labels for DC Power Cables. NOTE

By default, DC power cables delivered with a DC power module include a blue negative cable and a black positive cable. Connect the negative cable to the NEG (-) terminal and the positive cable to the RTN (+) terminal. Different DC power cables may be delivered in compliance with local regulations or customer requirements.

Step 4 (Only for power cables outside the cabinet) Route the power cables along the planned paths. Arrange the power cables from the power distribution frame (PDF) into a bundle and route them to the cabinet along the cable tray. Lead the power cables into the cabinet from the left side. NOTE

l To connect cables in the cabinet more conveniently, you can remove the side panels of the cabinet before connecting cables. l Use appropriate force on the cables. Dragging cables with too much force may damage them.

Step 5 Wear an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves. When wearing an ESD wrist strap, insert the other end in the ESD jack of a device and ensure that the device is reliably grounded. Step 6 Connect power cables to power modules. 1.

Place the required power cables near the switch.

2.

Use a Phillips screwdriver to loosen the screw on the power terminal cover, take off the screw and power terminal cover, and save them for later use. See callout 1 in Figure 7-4.

3.

(Optional) Cut the cables to the required length, and then crimp OT terminals on the cable ends. For details on how to crimp OT terminals, see Assembling Power Cables.

4.

Use a Phillips screwdriver to loosen the screws on the power terminals, take off the screws and washers, and save them for later use. See callout 2 in Figure 7-4.

5.

Connect the positive and negative power cables to the positive and negative power terminals on the power module. Put the screws through the washers and OT terminals on the power cables, and then tighten the screws. See callout 3 in Figure 7-4.

6.

Install the power terminal cover and secure it with the screw. See callout 4 in Figure 7-4. NOTE

The methods for connecting OT and JG bare crimp terminals are similar. The OT bare crimp terminal is used as an example here.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

105

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

7 Connecting Switches

Figure 7-4 Connecting power cables to a power module

1

2

3 CON CLK1

ETH ACT RUN/ALM

CLK2 RST

CON CLK1

ETH ACT RUN/ALM

CLK2 RST

PWR6 PWR5 CMU PWR4 PWR3

EG(-) EG( NEG(-)

) RTN(+)

4

N(+) RTN(+) MON

lb）

MON

kg（165

RS485

EG(-) EG( NEG(-) ≤75

RS485

ACT

ACT

RUN/ALM

RUN/ALM

PWR2 PWR1

ON ON

CMUA

OFF OFF

INPUT

INPUT

1

CMUA

2

ALM

ALM

Step 7 Connect power cables to the power distribution box or PDF. l

If a power distribution box is used, connect power cables to the power distribution box and then to the PDF.

l

If no power distribution box is used, connect power cables directly to the PDF.

Generally, power terminals on the power distribution box and PDF are cord end terminals or OT terminals. l

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

If OT terminals are used: a.

Place the required power cables near the power distribution box or PDF.

b.

(Optional) Cut the cables to the required length, and then crimp OT terminals on the cable ends. For details on how to crimp OT terminals, see Assembling Power Cables.

c.

Use a Phillips screwdriver to loosen the screws on the power terminals, take off the screws and washers, and save them for later use. See Figure 7-5.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

106

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

7 Connecting Switches

Figure 7-5 Removing screws from power terminals

d.

Connect the positive and negative power cables to the positive and negative power terminals. Put the screws through the washers and OT terminals on the power cables, and then tighten the screws. See Figure 7-6. Figure 7-6 Securing power cables with screws

l

If cord end terminals are used: a.

(Optional) Cut the cables to the required length, and then crimp cord end terminals on the cable ends. For details on how to crimp cord end terminals, see Assembling Power Cables.

b.

Loosen the screws on the power terminals to which the power cables will be connected. See Figure 7-7. Figure 7-7 Loosening screws on power terminals

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

107

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

c.

7 Connecting Switches

Insert the cord end terminals of the positive and negative cables to the positive and negative power terminals, respectively, and then tighten the screws. See Figure 7-8. Figure 7-8 Securing power cables with screws

Step 8 Arrange and bundle the power cables on the left side of the cabinet. See Figure 7-9. Figure 7-9 Bundling power cables

1

CON CLK1

ETH ACT RUN/ALM

CLK2 RST

CON CLK1

ETH ACT RUN/ALM

CLK2 RST

(-)) G(EG NE

) RTN(+

((-)) G(EG NE

) RTN(+

ON ON

OFF

INPUT

PWR6 PWR5 CMU

ALM

PWR4 PWR3 RUN/ALM

PWR2

ALM

RUN/ALM

INPUT

lb）

EG(-) EG NEG(-)

N(+)) RTN(+

RTN(+

)

RS485

EG(-) EG( NEG(-)

MON

kg（165

MON

≤75

RS485

ACT

PWR1

ACT

OFF

ON ON

CMUA

OFF OFF

INPUT

INPUT

1

CMUA

2

ALM

ALM

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

108

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

7 Connecting Switches

NOTE

l Ensure that power cables do not block power switches or indicators, or hinder installation of other power modules. See callout 1 in Figure 7-9. l Route power cables from the left side of the cabinet and bundle them with cable ties at 200-mm intervals. Do not bundle power cables at the bent part. l Bundle power cables with appropriate stress. Ensure that power cables are not crossed or twisted.

----End

7.1.2 Connecting AC Power Cables Context

DANGER l To avoid electric shock, do not connect or remove power cables while the power is on. l Insulate the power terminals and other exposed electrical parts. NOTE

l Before installing or removing a power module, remove the power cable from it. l A 2200 W AC power module is used with a 2200 W AC power distribution box and an AC power cable with a C19 straight female connector. An 800 W AC power module is used with an 800 W AC power distribution box and an AC power cable with a C13 straight female connector. l The AC power cables delivered with a switch can only be used on this switch. l Attach labels to the power switches that will be used during the operation. l Attach warning labels to the power switches that cannot be used during the operation. l Check labels on the power cables to ensure that the cables are connected correctly.

Figure 7-10 shows the power cable connection and applicable power cable terminals when no power distribution box is used. Figure 7-10 Power cable connection without any power distribution box

AC PDF

Circuit breaker A

Switch

Power cable

AC power module

OT or cord end terminal Figure 7-11 shows the power cable connection and applicable power cable terminals when a power distribution box is used. Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

109

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

7 Connecting Switches

Figure 7-11 Power cable connection with a power distribution box Cabinet AC power distribution box

AC PDF

Circuit breaker A

Power cable 1

Circuit breaker A1

Switch

Power cable 2

AC power module

Cord end terminal OT or cord end terminal

Tools and Accessories l

ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves

l

Phillips screwdriver

l

Diagonal pliers

l

Cable ties

l

Labels

Procedure Step 1 Turn off the power source to which the power cables need to be connected. Step 2 Measure the distance that the power cables will go through, and cut the AC power cables into an appropriate length according to the measured length. Step 3 Identify wires of the power cables, attach temporary labels to both ends of each power cable, and write numbers on the labels. For details on how to number the cables, see Engineering Labels for AC Power Cables. NOTE

By default, 3-wire AC power cables (with brown, blue, and yellow-green wires) are delivered. Connect the brown wire to the L terminal, blue wire to the N terminal, and the yellow-green to the ground terminal. Different AC power cables may be delivered in compliance with local regulations or customer requirements.

Step 4 (Only for power cables outside the cabinet) Route the power cables along the planned paths. Arrange the power cables from the power distribution frame (PDF) into a bundle and route them to the cabinet along the cable tray. Lead the power cables into the cabinet from the left side. NOTE

l To connect cables in the cabinet more conveniently, you can remove the side panels of the cabinet before connecting cables. l Use appropriate force on the cables. Dragging cables with too much force may damage the cables.

Step 5 Wear an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves. When wearing an ESD wrist strap, insert the other end to the ESD jack of a device and ensure that the device is reliably grounded. Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

110

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

7 Connecting Switches

Step 6 Connect power cables to power modules. 1.

Connect the plug of an AC power cable to the power socket on the corresponding power module. See callout 1 in a of Figure 7-12.

2.

Secure the power cable plug with the metal or plastic locking latch on the AC power module. See callout 2 and callout 3 in a of Figure 7-12. NOTE

An 800 W AC power module has a metal locking latch, and a 2200 W AC power module has a plastic locking latch.

Figure 7-12 Connecting a power cable to a power module Plastic locking latch

13 1 4 32

2

Metal locking latch CON

ETH ACT RUN/ALM

CLK2

CLK1

RST

CON

2

ETH ACT RUN/ALM

CLK2

CLK1

RST

RUN/ALM

2

1

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10 11

12 13

14 15

16 17

18 19

20 21

22 23

24 25

28 29

26 27

30 31

32 33

34 35

36 37

38 39

40 41

42 43

44 75

46 47

1 PWR6 PWR5 CMU PWR4 PWR3

RS485

RS485

ACT

ACT

RUN/ALM

RUN/ALM

PWR2 PWR1

lb）

MON

kg（165

MON

≤75

CMUA

ON ON

RUN

FAULT

RUN

1

CMUA

2

ALM

ALM

FAULT

OFF

OFF

Step 7 Connect power cables to the power distribution box or power distribution frame (PDF). l

If a power distribution box is used, connect power cables to the power distribution box and then to the PDF. NOTE

Follow these rules to route the power cables:

l

–

Cables at the rear of the AC power distribution box: routed from top to bottom

–

Cables at the bottom of the AC power distribution box: routed from rear to front

–

Cables at the front of the AC power distribution box: routed from bottom to terminals

If no power distribution box is used, connect power cables to the PDF directly.

Generally, power terminals on the power distribution box and PDF are cord end terminals or OT terminals. Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

111

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

l

7 Connecting Switches

If OT terminals are used: a.

Place the required power cables near the power distribution box or PDF.

b.

(Optional) Cut off redundant cables according to the required length, and then crimp OT terminals on the cable ends. For details on how to crimp OT terminals, see Assembling Power Cables.

c.

Use the Phillips screwdriver to loosen the screws on the power terminals, take off the screws and washers, and save them for later use. See Figure 7-13. Figure 7-13 Removing screws from power terminals

d.

Connect wires of power cables to the corresponding power terminals. Put the screws through the washers and OT terminals on the power cables, and then tighten the screws. See Figure 7-14. NOTE

n

Connect a brown wire (live wire) to an L terminal.

n

Connect a blue wire (neutral wire) to an N terminal.

n

Connect a yellow-green wire (earth wire) to a PE terminal.

Figure 7-14 Securing power cables with screws

l

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

If cord end terminals are used: a.

(Optional) Cut off redundant cables according to the required length, and then crimp cord end terminals on the cable ends. For details on how to crimp cord end terminals, see Assembling Power Cables.

b.

Loosen the screws on the power terminals to which the power cables will be connected (retain the screws on the terminals). See Figure 7-15. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

112

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

7 Connecting Switches

Figure 7-15 Loosening screws on power terminals

c.

Insert the cord end terminals of power cables to the power terminals, and then tighten the screws. See Figure 7-16. Figure 7-16 Securing power cables with screws

Step 8 Arrange and bundle the power cables on the left side of the cabinet. See Figure 7-17.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

113

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

7 Connecting Switches

Figure 7-17 Bundling power cables

CON

1

CLK1

ETH ACT RUN/ALM

CLK2 RST

CON CLK1

ETH ACT RUN/ALM

CLK2 RST

PWR6 PWR5

ON

CMU PWR4

RUN

PWR3 RUN/ALM ACT

RS485

RS485

FAULT ≤75

kg（165

lb）

OFF

MON

FAULT

ACT

PWR1

ALM

ALM

RUN/ALM

PWR2

RUN

MON

ON

OFF CMUA

ON ON

RUN

FAULT

RUN

1

CMUA

2

ALM

ALM

FAULT

OFF

OFF

NOTE

l Ensure that power cables do not block power switches, indicators or hinder installation of other power modules. See callout 1 in Figure 7-17. l Route power cables from the left side of the cabinet and bundle them with cable ties at 200-mm intervals. Do not bundle power cables at the bent part. l Bundle power cables with appropriate stress. Ensure that power cables are not crossed or twisted.

----End

7.2 Connecting Network Cables Context NOTE

l To connect cables in a cabinet more conveniently, you can remove the side panels of the cabinet before connecting cables. l When cables with large diameters are used in an N66E cabinet, there may not be sufficient space for the cables. For example, if Category 6 cables are used on 48-port electrical interface cards in an N66 cabinet, the front door of the cabinet may be unable to close.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

114

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

7 Connecting Switches

Tools and Accessories l

ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves

l

Phillips screwdriver

l

Diagonal pliers

l

Cable ties

l

Network cable labels

l

Tweezers (delivered with the switch)

Procedure Step 1 Determine the number and type of ports to be connected and plan the cabling route. Step 2 Select network cables of appropriate quantity and lengths based on the number of ports and measured cabling distances. Step 3 Attach temporary labels on both ends of each network cable and write numbers on the labels. For details on how to number network cables, see Engineering Labels for Network Cables. Step 4 (Optional) Route network cables on the planned path. Arrange the network cables straight, bundle the network cables (at most 20 cables in a bundle), and route them to a cabinet through the cable tray. Lead the network cables into the cabinet from the right side. Step 5 Wear an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves. When wearing an ESD wrist strap, insert the other end in the ESD jack of a device and ensure that the device is reliably grounded. Step 6 Connect network cables to ports of the switch. 1.

(Optional) Find the ports matching the numbers on the network cables, cut the cables to the required cable length, and crimp connectors on the network cables. For details, see 13.2.3 Assembling Ethernet Cables.

2.

Plug the network cable connectors to the matching ports. See Figure 7-18. After verifying that all network cables are correctly connected, go to Step 7.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

115

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

7 Connecting Switches

Figure 7-18 Connecting network cables

CON

ETH ACT RUN/ALM

CLK2

CLK1

RST

CON

ETH ACT RUN/ALM

CLK2

CLK1

RST

RUN/ALM

2

1

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10 11

12 13

14 15

16 17

18 19

20 21

22 23

24 25

28 29

26 27

30 31

32 33

34 35

36 37

38 39

40 41

42 43

44 75

46 47

PWR6 PWR5 CMU PWR4 PWR3

RS485

RS485

ACT

ACT

RUN/ALM

RUN/ALM

PWR2 PWR1

lb）

MON

kg（165

MON

≤75

CMUA ON ON ON ON

RUN

FAULT

RUN

FAULT

RUN

FAULT

CMUA

RUN ALM

ALM

ALM

ALM

FAULT

1

2

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

NOTE

If any network cable is incorrectly connected, use the tweezers delivered with the switch to remove the cable.

Step 7 Bundle network cables. Arrange network cables, put them through the cable management frames on the corresponding slots, and lead the cables out of the cabinet from the right side of the cabinet. Bundle network cables with cable ties at intervals of 20 cm to 30 cm. Use diagonal pliers to cut off redundant cable ties. When a lot of cables are connected to a card, the cable management frame for this slot may not have sufficient space. In this case, deploy cables in three layers without crossing each other, and then put the three layers through the cable management frame. See Figure 7-19.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

116

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

7 Connecting Switches

Figure 7-19 Deploying network cables in three layers

CON

ETH ACT RUN/ALM

CLK2

CLK1

RST

CON

ETH ACT RUN/ALM

CLK2

CLK1

RST

RUN/ALM

2

1

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10 11

12 13

14 15

16 17

18 19

20 21

24 25

22 23

28 29

26 27

30 31

32 33

34 35

36 37

38 39

40 41

42 43

44 75

46 47

PWR6 PWR5 CMU PWR4 PWR3

RS485

RS485

ACT

ACT

RUN/ALM

RUN/ALM

PWR2 PWR1

lb）

MON

kg（165

MON

≤75

CMUA ON ON ON ON

RUN

FAULT

RUN

FAULT

RUN

FAULT

CMUA

RUN ALM

ALM

ALM

ALM

FAULT

1

2

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

Step 8 Replace all the temporary labels with permanent labels on the network cables. ----End

Follow-up Procedure Use a rope to hang the tweezers in an appropriate place in the cabinet for later use.

7.3 Connecting High-Speed Cables Context NOTE

When cables with large diameters are used in an N66E cabinet, there may not be sufficient space for the cables.

Tools and Accessories l

ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves

l

Phillips screwdriver

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

117

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

l

Diagonal pliers

l

Cable ties

l

High-speed cable labels

7 Connecting Switches

Procedure Step 1 Determine the number and type of ports to be connected and plan the cabling route. Step 2 Select high-speed cables of appropriate quantity and lengths based on the number of ports and measured cabling distances. Step 3 Attach temporary labels on both ends of each high-speed cable and write numbers on the labels. For details on how to number high-speed cables, see Engineering Labels for User Cables. Step 4 (Optional) Route high-speed cables on the planned path. Arrange the high-speed cables straight and route them to a cabinet through the cable tray. Lead the high-speed cables into the cabinet from the right side. Step 5 Wear an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves. When wearing an ESD wrist strap, insert the other end in the ESD jack of a device and ensure that the device is reliably grounded. Step 6 Connect high-speed cables to ports of the switch. Find the ports matching the numbers on the high-speed cables and plug cable connectors into the ports. After verifying that all high-speed cables are correctly connected, go to Step 7. Hold the connector of a high-speed cable in the correct direction when inserting it into a port. When you hear a click, the high-speed cable is securely connected to the port.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

118

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

7 Connecting Switches

Figure 7-20 Connecting a high-speed cable

CON

ETH ACT RUN/ALM

CLK2

CLK1

RST

CON

ETH ACT RUN/ALM

CLK2

CLK1

RST

RUN/ALM

2

1

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10 11

12 13

14 15

16 17

18 19

20 21

22 23

24 25

28 29

26 27

30 31

32 33

34 35

36 37

38 39

40 41

42 43

44 75

46 47

PWR6 PWR5 CMU PWR4 PWR3

RS485

RS485

ACT

ACT

RUN/ALM

RUN/ALM

PWR2 PWR1

lb）

MON

kg（165

MON

≤75

CMUA ON ON ON ON

RUN

FAULT

RUN

FAULT

RUN

FAULT

CMUA

RUN ALM

ALM

ALM

ALM

FAULT

1

2

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

To remove a high-speed cable, gently push the cable connector and then pull the handle of the connector. Do not forcibly pull the cable connector. See Figure 7-21.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

119

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

7 Connecting Switches

Figure 7-21 Removing a high-speed cable

1

2 CON

ETH ACT RUN/ALM

CLK2

CLK1

RST

CON

ETH ACT RUN/ALM

CLK2

CLK1

RST

RUN/ALM

2

1

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10 11

12 13

14 15

16 17

18 19

20 21

22 23

24 25

28 29

26 27

30 31

32 33

34 35

36 37

38 39

40 41

42 43

44 75

46 47

PWR6 PWR5 CMU PWR4 PWR3

RS485

RS485

ACT

ACT

RUN/ALM

RUN/ALM

PWR2 PWR1

lb）

MON

kg（165

MON

≤75

CMUA ON ON ON ON

RUN

FAULT

RUN

FAULT

RUN

FAULT

CMUA

RUN ALM

ALM

ALM

ALM

FAULT

1

2

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

NOTE

The top side of a QSFP+ cable connector is the side with an L-shaped recess, as shown in Figure 7-22. When connecting a QSFP+ cable to a port on a CSS card, make the top side face down. When connecting a QSFP+ cable to other types of ports, make the top side face up. Do not insert the QSFP+ cable connector backwards. Both ends of a QSFP+ high-speed cable must be covered with ESD caps.

Figure 7-22 QSFP+ high-speed cable connector

Step 7 Bundle high-speed cables. Arrange high-speed cables, put them through the cable management frames on the corresponding slots, and lead the cables out of the cabinet from the left side of the cabinet. Bundle high-speed cables with cable ties at intervals of 20 cm to 30 cm. Use diagonal pliers to cut off redundant cable ties. Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

120

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

7 Connecting Switches

When a lot of cables are connected to a card, the cable management frame for this slot may not have sufficient space. In this case, deploy cables in three layers without crossing each other, and then put the three layers through the cable management frame. See Figure 7-23. Figure 7-23 Deploying high-speed cables in three layers

CON

ETH ACT RUN/ALM

CLK2

CLK1

RST

CON

ETH ACT RUN/ALM

CLK2

CLK1

RST

RUN/ALM

2

1

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10 11

12 13

14 15

16 17

18 19

20 21

22 23

24 25

28 29

26 27

30 31

32 33

34 35

36 37

38 39

40 41

42 43

44 75

46 47

PWR6 PWR5 CMU PWR4 PWR3

RS485

RS485

ACT

ACT

RUN/ALM

RUN/ALM

PWR2 PWR1

lb）

MON

kg（165

MON

≤75

CMUA ON ON ON ON

RUN

FAULT

RUN

FAULT

RUN

FAULT

CMUA

RUN ALM

ALM

ALM

ALM

FAULT

1

2

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

It is not recommended to connect copper cables and optical fibers to the same card because copper cables may block the routes of optical fibers. If the copper cables and optical fibers are used on the same card, connect the optical fibers to ports near the left side of the card and the copper cables to ports near the right side, as shown in Figure 7-24. Figure 7-24 Connecting copper cables and optical fibers to the same card

Step 8 Replace all the temporary labels with permanent labels on the high-speed cables. ----End Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

121

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

7 Connecting Switches

7.4 Installing Optical Modules and Connecting Optical Fibers Context

NOTICE l Do not look into bores of optical modules or connectors of optical fibers without eye protection. l The bend radius of an optical fiber must be 20 times larger than its diameter. Generally, the bend radius of optical fibers should be no less than 40 mm. l Install or remove optical fibers carefully to avoid damage to fiber connectors. l If a fiber connector is dirty, use an alcohol swab or a piece of air-laid paper to gently wipe the fiber connector in one direction.

Tools and Accessories l

ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves

l

Scissors

l

Insulation tape

l

Corrugated pipe

l

Fiber binding tape

l

Engineering labels for optical fibers

l

Tweezers (delivered with the switch)

Procedure Step 1 Determine the number and type of ports to be connected and plan the cabling route. Step 2 Select optical fibers of appropriate modes, quantity, and lengths according to the optical module types, number of ports to be connected, and measured cabling distance. Step 3 Attach temporary labels on both ends of each optical fiber and write numbers on the labels. For details on how to number optical fibers, see Engineering Labels for Optical Fibers. Step 4 Unroll optical fibers and bundle them. See Table 7-1 to determine the number of optical fibers in each bundle. Cut protection pipes into appropriate lengths according to optical fiber lengths, and then put optical fibers through the protection pipes. Wrap both ends of a protection pipe with adhesive tape to prevent damage to optical fibers.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

122

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

7 Connecting Switches

NOTICE When routing optical fibers in a corrugated pipe, you must wrap both ends of the pipe with adhesive tape to prevent shape edges of the pipe from damaging the optical fibers. Table 7-1 lists the types and capacities of protection pipes. Table 7-1 Protection pipe types and capacities Type

Maximum Number of Optical Fibers

Open corrugated pipe

60

Closed corrugated pipe

12

Winding pipe

l Pipe with an external diameter of 6 mm: 10 l Pipe with an external diameter of 20 mm: 20

Step 5 (Optional) Route optical fibers from the optical distribution frame to the cabinet along the planned path. Open corrugated pipes are recommended. Keep 100 mm of a protection pipe inside the cabinet, as shown in Figure 7-25. Figure 7-25 Length of protection pipe inside the cabinet

100mm

Step 6 Wear an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves. When wearing an ESD wrist strap, insert the other end in the ESD jack of a device and ensure that the device is reliably grounded. Step 7 Remove dust plugs from the optical ports to be connected and install optical modules on the optical ports. Hold the connector of an optical module in the correct direction when inserting it into a port. When you hear a click, the optical module is securely connected to the port. See Figure 7-27.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

123

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

7 Connecting Switches

NOTE

The top side of a QSFP+ optical module is the side with an L-shaped recess, as shown in Figure 7-26. When connecting a QSFP+ optical module to a port on a CSS card, make the top side face down. When connecting a QSFP+ optical module to other types of ports, make the top side face up. Do not insert the optical module backwards.

Figure 7-26 QSFP+ optical module

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

124

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

7 Connecting Switches

Figure 7-27 Installing an optical module

CON

ETH ACT RUN/ALM

CLK2

CLK1

RST

CON

ETH ACT RUN/ALM

CLK2

CLK1

RST

RUN/ALM

2

1

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10 11

12 13

14 15

16 17

18 19

20 21

22 23

24 25

28 29

26 27

30 31

32 33

34 35

36 37

38 39

40 41

42 43

44 75

46 47

PWR6 PWR5 CMU PWR4 PWR3

RS485

RS485

ACT

ACT

RUN/ALM

RUN/ALM

PWR2 PWR1

lb）

MON

kg（165

MON

≤75

CMUA ON ON ON ON

RUN

FAULT

RUN

FAULT

RUN

FAULT

CMUA

RUN ALM

ALM

ALM

ALM

FAULT

1

2

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

To remove an optical module, rotate the handle down, gently push the optical module, and then pull out the optical module by the handle. See Figure 7-28. Figure 7-28 Removing an optical module

1 2

Step 8 Connect optical fibers to the optical modules. Remove dust plugs from the optical modules and insert fiber connectors into the corresponding optical ports. After verifying that all optical fibers are correctly connected, go to Step 9. To connect optical fibers to an optical module, align the fiber connector with the bores on the optical module and insert the fiber connector. When you hear a click, the optical fiber is securely connected. See Figure 7-29. Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

125

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

7 Connecting Switches

Figure 7-29 Connecting optical fibers to an optical module

0

CON

ETH ACT RUN/ALM

CLK2

CLK1

RST

CON

ETH ACT RUN/ALM

CLK2

CLK1

RST

RUN/ALM

2

1

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10 11

12 13

14 15

16 17

18 19

20 21

22 23

24 25

28 29

26 27

30 31

32 33

34 35

36 37

38 39

40 41

42 43

44 75

46 47

PWR6 PWR5 CMU PWR4 PWR3

RS485

RS485

ACT

ACT

RUN/ALM

RUN/ALM

PWR2 PWR1

lb）

MON

kg（165

MON

≤75

CMUA ON ON ON ON

RUN

FAULT

RUN

FAULT

RUN

FAULT

CMUA

RUN ALM

ALM

ALM

ALM

FAULT

1

2

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

To remove an optical fiber, gently push the fiber connector, and then pull the fiber connector while pressing the locking clips. Do not forcibly pull the fiber connector. See Figure 7-30. NOTE

If many optical fibers are connected to an interface card with a high port density, use the tweezers delivered with the switch to remove optical fibers.

Figure 7-30 Removing optical fibers

2 0

Locking clip 1

Step 9 Bundle optical fibers. Put optical fibers through the cable management frames of the corresponding slots and use fiber binding tapes to bundle optical fibers at 20 cm to 30 cm intervals. See Figure 7-31. Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

126

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

7 Connecting Switches

Figure 7-31 Bundling optical fibers

CON

ETH ACT RUN/ALM

CLK2

CLK1

RST

CON

ETH ACT RUN/ALM

CLK2

CLK1

RST

RUN/ALM

2

1

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10 11

12 13

14 15

16 17

18 19

20 21

22 23

24 25

28 29

26 27

30 31

32 33

34 35

36 37

38 39

40 41

42 43

44 75

46 47

PWR6 PWR5 CMU PWR4 PWR3

RS485

RS485

ACT

ACT

RUN/ALM

RUN/ALM

PWR2 PWR1

lb）

MON

kg（165

MON

≤75

CMUA ON ON ON ON

RUN

FAULT

RUN

FAULT

RUN

FAULT

CMUA

RUN ALM

ALM

ALM

ALM

FAULT

1

2

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

It is not recommended to connect copper cables and optical fibers to the same card because copper cables may block the routes of optical fibers. If the copper cables and optical fibers are used on the same card, connect the optical fibers to ports near the left side of the card and the copper cables to ports near the right side, as shown in Figure 7-32. Figure 7-32 Connecting copper cables and optical fibers to the same card

Step 10 Replace all the temporary labels on the optical fibers with permanent labels. ----End

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

127

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

7 Connecting Switches

Follow-up Procedure Use a rope to hang the tweezers in an appropriate place in the cabinet for later use.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

128

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

8

8 Post-Installation Checking

Post-Installation Checking

Table 8-1 lists the items to be checked after you complete switch installation. Table 8-1 Post-installation checklist

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

No.

Check Item

Method

1

The installation position of the cabinet meets the requirement in the associated engineering design document.

View

2

Components are correctly installed in the cabinet. No components are loose or damaged.

View

3

All the screws are correctly secured. The chassis bottom is completely attached to the guide rails or tray.

View

4

The vertical deviation of the cabinet is less than 3 mm. You can use a plumb line to measure the vertical deviation.

Measure

5

The cabinets on the sides of the main path are aligned, with a deviation of less than 5 mm.

Measure

6

The surfaces of the cabinets in the same row are on the same plane. The cabinets are deployed close to each other.

View

7

The front door of a cabinet can be opened and closed easily.

View

8

The cable outlets on the top and bottom of the cabinet are sealed.

View

9

All the signal cables have passed a continuity check.

View and measure

10

Routes of signal cables comply with the engineering design document.

View

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

129

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

8 Post-Installation Checking

No.

Check Item

Method

11

The signal cables are not placed on the air vent of the cabinet.

View

12

Signal cables are not damaged or broken and have no splices.

View

13

Signal cable connectors are clean and intact, and correctly connected. Wires of each signal cable are securely crimped in the connectors.

View

14

Signal cables do not cross each other and have sufficient slack at the bent part. (Signal cables can be crossed within 1 m outside the cabinet.)

View

15

Each signal cable has correct, clear, and tidy labels attached on both ends.

View

16

Pigtail fibers outside a cabinet are laid in a protection pipe or trough and are not squeezed by other cables or objects.

View

17

Optical fibers are led into a cabinet through a corrugated pipe. The corrugated pipe in the cabinet should be not more than 100 mm long and be bundled onto the cabinet.

View and measure

18

The bend radius of optical fibers is 20 times larger than their diameter. Generally, the bend radius of optical fibers should be no less than 40 mm. The path of optical fibers is not blocked by any components.

View and measure

19

Each pair of fibers is bundled by binding tape with appropriate force.

View

20

The routes of power cables and ground cables conform to the engineering design document, facilitating future maintenance and system expansion.

View

21

All power cables and ground cables are complete copper wires without splices. Coatings of power cables and ground cables are intact.

View

22

Power cables and ground cables are connected properly. The spring washer of each ground terminal is placed on the flat washer.

View

23

Diameters of power cables and ground cables conform to the associated engineering design document, meeting the power distribution requirements.

View

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

130

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

8 Post-Installation Checking

No.

Check Item

Method

24

Power cables and ground cables are separated from signal cables.

View

25

Power cables and ground cables are routed straightly and properly bundled, with sufficient slack at the bend part.

View

26

The redundant part of the power cables and ground cables is cut off.

View

27

Power cables, ground cables, and power switches on power distribution boxes and power distribution frames are identified by correct, legible labels.

View

28

The lugs of the power cables and ground cables are soldered or crimped tightly.

View

29

Metal components in a cabinet have good electrical connections with the rack. Screw mounting holes, guide rails, and mounting brackets are not covered with insulation painting.

View

30

Ground busbars of adjacent cabinets are connected through busbar cables.

View

31

The yellow-green ground cables are correctly connected. One end of a ground cable is connected to the PGND ground bar in the power distribution cabinet, and the other end is connected to the ground point on the cabinet. Screws at both ends of the ground cable are securely fastened.

View

32

The removable handles are hanging at the rear of the chassis.

View

33

The new switch will not cause loops on the current network. For example, this switch cannot be connected to another device using two links.

View the networking diagram

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

131

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

9

9 Powering on a Switch for the First Time

Powering on a Switch for the First Time

Turn on the circuit breakers on the power distribution frame and power distribution box in turn, and then turn on the power switches on the power modules of the switch. Observe indicators of modules on the switch. NOTE

The colors and meaning of indicators on the S9300 and S9300E switches are the same. Indicators on an S9306 switch are used as an example here.

Figure 9-1 shows the indicators at the front of an S9306 switch. Figure 9-1 Indicators at the front of an S9306 switch

4

Quidway S9306

00RUB00

LE0D

ACT RUN/ALM RST

CLK1

CLK2

CON

ETH LE0D

LE0D

CLK1

CLK2

CON

RST

ACT RUN/ALM

RST

ACT RUN/ALM

00SRUB00

00SRUB00

SYNC

ETH LE0D

LE0D

00SRUB00

00SRUB00

SYNC

08

07

RUN/ALM

1

2 LINK ACT

3

4

LINK ACT

LINK ACT

5 LINK ACT

6 LINK ACT

7 LINK ACT

8 LINK ACT

10

9 LINK ACT

LINK ACT

11 LINK ACT

LINK ACT

X12XSA00

LINK ACT

LE0D

X12XSA00

LE0D

0

3 RUN/ALM

ON RUN

1

ON

OFF

LINK ACT

RUN

ALM

FAULT

PoE4

ON RUN

ALM

PoE3

100-120V-;200-240V-;50/60Hz；15.5A

100-120V-;200-240V-;50/60Hz；15.5A

100-120V-;200-240V-;50/60Hz；15.5A

ON

OFF

PoE2

X12XSA00

PoE1

LE0D

11

ALM

FAULT

OFF

FAULT

2

RUN ALM

OFF

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

FAULT

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

132

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

9 Powering on a Switch for the First Time

Figure 9-2 shows the indicators at the rear of an S9306 switch. Figure 9-2 Indicators at the rear of an S9306 switch

ћ⾷൞伄᡽儎䙕ᰁ䖢ᰬ᧛䀜ਬ⡽έ DON’T TOUCH THE FAN LEAVES BEFORE THEY SLOW DOWN !

RUN/ALM

5 ћ⾷൞伄᡽儎䙕ᰁ䖢ᰬ᧛䀜ਬ⡽έ DON’T TOUCH THE FAN LEAVES BEFORE THEY SLOW DOWN !

RUN/ALM

RUN/ALM

Table 9-1 lists the normal indicator states after the switch is powered on. Table 9-1 Indicator description

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

No.

Module

Indicator

Color

Description

1

1600 W DC power module (S9300)

INPUT

Green

Steady on: The input power is normal.

ALARM

Red

Off: The protection circuit is working properly.

l 800 W AC power modul e (S9300 &S930 0E) l 2200 W AC power modul e (W2PS A2230 ) (S9300

RUN

Green

Steady on: The power input is normal.

ALM

Yellow

Off: The power module is working normally.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

133

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

No.

2

9 Powering on a Switch for the First Time

Module

Indicator

Color

Description

&S930 0E) l 2200 W DC power modul e (S9300 &S930 0E)

FAULT

Red

Off: The power module has no unrecoverable failure.

CMU

RUN/AL M

Green

Slow blinking: The system software of the card is running normally. Fast blinking: The system software of the card is unregistered.

ACT

Green

Steady on: The card is the active CMU. Off: The card is the standby CMU.

3

LPU

RUN/AL M

Green

Steady on: The card has been powered on but the system software is not running. Slow blinking: The system software of the card is running normally. Fast blinking: The system software of the card is starting.

4

MPU

RUN/AL M

Yellow

Steady on: The card is powered off.

Green

Steady on: The card has been powered on but the system software is not running. Slow blinking: The system software of the card is running normally. Fast blinking: The system software of the card is starting.

ACT

Yellow

Steady on: The card is powered off.

Green

Steady on: The card is the active MPU of the switch. Off: The card is the standby MPU of the switch.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

134

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

9 Powering on a Switch for the First Time

No.

Module

Indicator

Color

Description

5

Fan module

RUN/AL M

Green

Slow blinking: The fan module is working and communicating with the system normally. Fast blinking: The fan module is working normally but is not communicating with the system.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

135

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

10

10 Switch Cluster Setup Guide

Switch Cluster Setup Guide

About This Chapter 10.1 S9300 Clustering Using CSS Cards 10.2 S300E Clustering Using CSS Cards 10.3 S9300&S9300E Clustering Using Service Ports

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

136

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

10 Switch Cluster Setup Guide

10.1 S9300 Clustering Using CSS Cards Context The S9306 and S9312 switches support clustering using Cluster Switching System (CSS) cards. When using this cluster mode, the switches must have double main control units installed. In addition, the main control units must be the LE0DSRUA or LE0D00SRUB00 model, and have LE0D0VSTSA00 CSS cards installed in subcard slots. MPUs in one chassis must be the same model. MPUs in the local and peer chassis can be different models but are recommended to be the same model.

NOTICE l When installing a copper cable, optical module, or optical fiber, you can determine that it has been installed properly after hearing a click. l When removing a copper cable, optical module, or optical fiber, push its connector or handle slightly and then pull it out. l Ensure that the bend radius of the copper cables or optical fibers is greater than the minimum bend rand required. The minimum bend radius of a QSFP+ to QSFP+ copper cable is 50.8 mm, and the minimum bend radius of an optical fiber is generally larger than or equal to 40 mm.

Tools and Accessories l

ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves

l

Phillips screwdriver

l

Diagonal pliers

l

Cable ties

l

Labels

Procedure Step 1 Wear an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves. When wearing an ESD wrist strap, ensure that the ESD wrist strap is in a close contact with your wrist, and insert the other end in the ESD jack of a cabinet/rack. Step 2 Install a CSS card in the subcard slot of each main control unit, as shown in 6.2 (Optional) Installing a CSS Subcard or an Enhanced Flexible Service Subcard. Step 3 Install the main control units in main control slots of the switches, as shown in 6.4 Installing a Card. Step 4 Attach labels on both ends of the copper cables or optical fibers, with numbers 1 to 8 on the labels. Step 5 Connect the QSFP+ stack ports with cluster cables. Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

137

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

10 Switch Cluster Setup Guide

Quidway S9306

Quidway S9306

2

1

4

3

8

CSS ID

CLK1

CLK2

CON

SYNC

CSS ID

CLK1

CLK2

CON

ACT RUN/ALM

SYNC

RST

ON

ON RUN

FAULT

ON RUN

ALM

FAULT

ON RUN

ALM

OFF

1

FAULT

ON

FAULT

ETH

CLK1

CLK2

CON

ETH

3

VSTS

4

SYNC

RST

ACT RUN/ALM

RST

ACT RUN/ALM

ON RUN

FAULT

ON

FAULT

PoE3

PoE4

RUN

ALM

OFF

PoE2

ON RUN

ALM

OFF

07

5

RUN

ALM

OFF

08

6

PoE1

ALM

OFF

CON

RUN/ALM

PoE4

RUN

ALM

OFF

2

3 PoE3

CLK2

SYNC

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

4

PoE2

CLK1 RUN/ALM

VSTS

4

LINK

8 PoE1

OFF

ACT RUN/ALM

7 6

3

SRUB00

VSTS

4

2

LE0D00

5

3

1

MASTER 1 2 3 4

SRUA00

2

07

ES0D00

SRUA00

1

SRUB00

ES0D00

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

LINK 1 2 3 4

5 6 7 8

CSS ID

ETH

RUN/ALM

LE0D00

LINK

MASTER 1 2 3 4

RST

SRUB00

VSTS

4

LE0D00

3

1

MASTER 1 2 3 4

SRUA00

2

08

ES0D00

SRUA00

1

SRUB00

ES0D00

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

2

CSS ID

ETH

RUN/ALM

LE0D00

LINK

MASTER 1 2 3 4

7

FAULT

ALM

OFF

FAULT

Cluster cables NOTE

l CSS ports on the CSS cards of the S9300 must be connected. l To connect the QSFP+ stack ports with optical fibers, install QSFP+ optical modules on the stack ports, and then connect optical fibers to the optical modules. l To connect the QSFP+ stack ports with QSFP+ copper cables, directly connect the copper cables to the stack ports. l S9306 switches are used as an example here. Cable connections between S9312 switches are the same.

Step 6 Arrange the cables, route the cables through cable management frames, and bundle them with cable ties. Step 7 (Optional) Wrap redundant cables in cable management trays.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

138

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

10 Switch Cluster Setup Guide

----End

10.2 S300E Clustering Using CSS Cards Context The S9706 and S9712 switches support clustering using Cluster Switching System (CSS) cards. When using this cluster mode, the switches must have double main control units installed. In addition, the main control units must be the LE2D2SRUC000 model and have LE2D2VS08000 CSS cards installed in subcard slots. MPUs in one chassis must be the same model. MPUs in the local and peer chassis can be different models but are recommended to be the same model.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

139

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

10 Switch Cluster Setup Guide

NOTICE l A CSS card is not hot swappable. l When installing a copper cable, optical module, or optical fiber, you can determine that it has been installed properly after hearing a click. l When removing a copper cable, optical module, or optical fiber, push its connector or handle slightly and then pull it out. l Ensure that the bend radius of the copper cables or optical fibers is greater than the minimum bend rand required. The minimum bend radiuses of an SFP+ to SFP+ copper cable and an active optical cable (AOC) are 25 mm and 30 mm, respectively. The minimum bend radius of an optical fiber is generally larger than or equal to 40 mm.

Tools and Accessories l

ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves

l

Phillips screwdriver

l

Diagonal pliers

l

Cable ties

l

Labels

Procedure Step 1 Wear an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves. When wearing an ESD wrist strap, ensure that the ESD wrist strap is in a close contact with your wrist, and insert the other end in the ESD jack of a cabinet/rack. Step 2 Install a CSS card in the subcard slot of each main control unit, as shown in 6.2 (Optional) Installing a CSS Subcard or an Enhanced Flexible Service Subcard. Step 3 Install the main control units in main control slots of the switches, as shown in 6.4 Installing a Card. Step 4 Attach number labels on both ends of the cluster cables. Step 5 Connect the stack ports with cluster cables. Each CSS card has eight SFP+ ports, which are divided into two groups. (Group 1 includes ports 1 to 4, and group 2 includes 5 to 8.) See the following figure to connect cables between groups. Ports in a group can be connected in any sequence, but each group must have at least one cable connected.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

140

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

10 Switch Cluster Setup Guide

S9306E

S9306E

2 4 1 3

2 4

6 8

5 7

1 3 CSS ID

RUN/ALM

5

4

6

7

CLK1

CLK2

7

ON

ON RUN

FAULT

5

6

7

RST

8

CLK2

FAULT

07

3

5

4

6

7

MASTER

CSS ID

4 5 6 7 8

1

2

3

5

4

6

7

1 3

ON

ON RUN

Group 1

FAULT

ON RUN

ALM

FAULT

8

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

ACT RUN/ALM RST CLK1

CLK2

08

07

CONSOLE

ON RUN

ALM

OFF

7

6 8

RUN

ALM

OFF

6

5 7

2 4

OFF

5

CONSOLE

8

VS08

FAULT

4

RST CLK2

SYNC

CONSOLE

ALM

3

ACT RUN/ALM

CLK1

LINK/ALM 1 2 3

2

8

RUN/ALM

RUN

OFF

2

8

ON

ALM

OFF

4

6 8

RUN

ALM

OFF

3

5 7

2 4

FAULT

2

ACT RUN/ALM

CLK1

1

SRUC000

1 3

ALM

1

1

SYNC

4 5 6 7 8

EH1D2

6

LINK/ALM 1 2 3

SRUC000

5

4

MASTER

EH1D2

3

CSS ID

RUN/ALM

VS08

SRUC000

SRUC000

2

08

CONSOLE

EH1D2

EH1D2

1

5 7

8

RST

8

SYNC

4 5 6 7 8

7

SRUC000

3

CSS ID

RUN

6

EH1D2

2

LINK/ALM

ON

5

SRUC000

1

VS08

OFF

4

ACT RUN/ALM

RUN/ALM

1 2 3

3

EH1D2

4 5 6 7 8

VS08

MASTER

2

SRUC000

SRUC000

1 2 3

1

SYNC

EH1D2

EH1D2

LINK/ALM

MASTER

6 8

FAULT

ALM

OFF

FAULT

Group 2

Cluster cables

NOTE

l To connect the stack ports with optical fibers, install SFP+ optical modules on the stack ports, and then connect optical fibers to the optical modules. l To connect the stack ports with SFP+ copper cables, directly connect the copper cables to the stack ports. l S9306E switches are used as an example here. Cable connections between S9712E switches are the same.

Step 6 Arrange the cables, route the cables through cable management frames, and bundle them with cable ties. Step 7 (Optional) Wrap redundant cables in cable management trays.

----End Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

141

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

10 Switch Cluster Setup Guide

10.3 S9300&S9300E Clustering Using Service Ports Context The S9306&S9312 and S9306E&S9312E switches support service port clustering. To use this clustering mode, each switch must have at least one main control unit. In addition, each switch can use at most two Line Processing Units (LPUs) for cluster connection. It is recommended that the two LPUs be the same model. The two chassis must use the same type of ports for cluster connection, for example, 10GE SFP+ optical ports.

NOTICE l When installing a copper cable, optical module, or optical fiber, you can determine that it has been installed properly after hearing a click. l When removing a copper cable, optical module, or optical fiber, push its connector or handle slightly and then pull it out. l Ensure that the bend radius of the copper cables or optical fibers is greater than the minimum bend rand required. The minimum bend radiuses of an SFP+ to SFP+ copper cable, QSFP+ to QSFP+ copper cable, and active optical cable (AOC) are 25 mm, 50.8 mm, and 30 mm, respectively. The minimum bend radius of an optical fiber is generally larger than or equal to 40 mm.

Tools and Accessories l

ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves

l

Phillips screwdriver

l

Diagonal pliers

l

Cable ties

l

Labels

Procedure Step 1 Wear an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves. When wearing an ESD wrist strap, ensure that the ESD wrist strap is in a close contact with your wrist, and insert the other end in the ESD jack of a cabinet/rack. Step 2 Install LPUs in the planned slots of the switches, as shown in 6.4 Installing a Card. Step 3 Attach number labels on both ends of the cluster cables. Step 4 Connect the stack ports with cluster cables.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

142

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

10 Switch Cluster Setup Guide

The two ends must have same type and quantity of member ports. Member ports on one end can be connected to any member ports on the other end.

Recommended: Install LPUS symmetrically beside MPU slots

Switch B

Switch A Logical CSS port MPU slots

Physical member port

Cluster cable

LPU slots

NOTE

l To connect the stack ports with optical fibers, install optical modules on the stack ports, and then connect optical fibers to the optical modules. l To connect the stack ports with copper cables, directly connect the copper cables to the stack ports.

Step 5 Arrange the cables, route the cables through cable management frames, and bundle them with cable ties. ----End

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

143

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

11

11 Maintaining Switches

Maintaining Switches

About This Chapter NOTE

l Properly save the items that do not need repair (such as the optical modules and cables for the faulty component). l Unless otherwise specified, pluggable modules of a switch support hot swap.

11.1 Replacing a Power Module 11.2 Replacing a Fan Module 11.3 Replacing a Service Card 11.4 Replacing an MPU 11.5 Replacing an Optical Module 11.6 Replacing an Air Filter

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

144

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

11 Maintaining Switches

11.1 Replacing a Power Module Context

CAUTION l Before replacing a power module, turn off the power switch on the power module, and then turn off the corresponding circuit breaker in the power distribution cabinet to power off the power module. l Be careful of the heat on a power module when replacing it. l When removing a power module, do not touch the operating power modules with your body or any tools to avoid electric shocks or short circuits. To replace the power modules in a running switch, take the following measures to avoid impact of the replacement on the running services: l

If there are empty power slots in the switch, install a new power module in an empty slot first. Remove the power module to be replaced after the new power module starts to work normally. Then replace other power modules one by one.

l

If all the power slots in the switch are occupied, determine whether replacing a power module will affect the running services. It is recommended that you replace the power modules one by one, and replace the next one when the new power module works normally. NOTE

The following procedure replaces a vertically installed power module. The procedure for replacing a horizontally installed power module is similar.

Tools l

ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves

l

Phillips screwdriver

Procedure Step 1 Find the power module that needs to be replaced. Before replacing a power module, determine in which cabinet and chassis the power module is installed, find the power module in the chassis, and attach a label on the panel of the power module to avoid misoperation. Step 2 Turn the power switch on the power module to the OFF position, and then turn off the corresponding circuit breaker in the power distribution cabinet to power off the power module. Step 3 Wear an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves. When wearing an ESD wrist strap, insert the other end to the ESD jack of a device and ensure that the device is reliably grounded. Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

145

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

11 Maintaining Switches

Step 4 Remove the power cable from the power module to be replaced. Perform the following steps to remove the AC power cable from an AC power module. Release the plastic or metal locking latch on the AC power module, and then remove the AC power cable. See Figure 11-1. Figure 11-1 Removing an AC power cable Plastic locking latch

a

b

c

2 1

2 1

Metal locking latch CON

ETH ACT RUN/ALM

CLK2

CLK1

1

RST

CON

ETH ACT RUN/ALM

CLK2

CLK1

RST

RUN/ALM

2

1

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10 11

12 13

14 15

16 17

18 19

20 21

22 23

24 25

28 29

26 27

30 31

32 33

34 35

36 37

38 39

40 41

42 43

44 75

46 47

2 PWR6 PWR5 CMU PWR4 PWR3

RS485

RS485

ACT

ACT

RUN/ALM

RUN/ALM

PWR2 PWR1

lb）

MON

kg（165

MON

≤75

CMUA

ON ON

RUN

FAULT

RUN

1

CMUA

2

ALM

ALM

FAULT

OFF

OFF

Perform the following steps to remove the DC power cables from a DC power module. 1.

Use a Phillips screwdriver to loosen the screw on the power terminal cover, and then remove the cover. See callout 1 in Figure 11-2.

2.

Loosen the screws on the DC power terminals, take out the DC power cables and screws, and save them for later use. See callout 2 in Figure 11-2. NOTE

The methods for removing an OT terminal and a JG terminal from a DC power module are the same. An OT terminal is used as an example here.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

146

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

11 Maintaining Switches

Figure 11-2 Removing DC power cables

1

CON

ETH ACT RUN/ALM

CLK2

CLK1

RST

CON

ETH ACT RUN/ALM

CLK2

CLK1

RST

RUN/ALM

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10 11

12 13

14 15

16 17

18 19

20 21

22 23

24 25

28 29

26 27

30 31

32 33

34 35

36 37

38 39

40 41

42 43

44 75

46 47

PWR6 PWR5 CMU PWR4 PWR3

EG(-) E NEG(-)

EG(-) EG( NEG(-)

RS485

) RTN(+)

RS485

ACT lb）

MON

kg（165

MON

≤75

) RTN(+)

ON

2

ACT

RUN/ALM

RUN/ALM

PWR2 PWR1

ON

CMUA

OFF OFF

INPUT

INPUT

1

CMUA

2

ALM

ALM

Step 5 Remove the power module. 1.

Rotate the Phillips screwdriver counterclockwise to loosen the captive screw on the ejector lever of the power module. See callout 1 in Figure 11-3.

2.

Raise the ejector lever to release the power module from the backplane. See callout 2 in Figure 11-3.

3.

Slowly pull out the power module with one hand and hold the power module with the other hand. See callout 3 in Figure 11-3.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

147

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

11 Maintaining Switches

Figure 11-3 Removing a power module

CON

ETH ACT RUN/ALM

CLK2

CLK1

RST

CON

ETH ACT RUN/ALM

CLK2

CLK1

RST

RUN/ALM

2 1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10 11

12 13

14 15

16 17

18 19

20 21

22 23

24 25

28 29

26 27

30 31

32 33

34 35

36 37

38 39

40 41

42 43

44 75

46 47

3 ON

RUN

1

PWR6 PWR5 CMU

ALM

PWR4

RS485

OFF

RS485

ACT

PWR1

ACT

RUN/ALM

RUN/ALM

PWR3 PWR2

FAULT

lb）

MON

kg（165

MON

≤75

CMUA ON ON ON

RUN

RUN

FAULT

FAULT

CMUA

RUN ALM

ALM

ALM

FAULT

1

2

OFF

OFF

OFF

ON

RUN ALM FAULT

OFF

Step 6 Insert the new power module into the power module slot. 1.

Hold the new power module with one hand on the front panel and the other hand under the bottom. Slowly push the power module along the guide rails in the slot, until the power module is completely attached to the backplane. See callout 1 in Figure 11-4.

2.

Lower the ejector lever until it is securely attached to the power module. See callout 2 in Figure 11-4.

3.

Rotate the Phillips screwdriver clockwise to tighten the captive screw on the ejector lever. See callout 3 in Figure 11-4.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

148

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

11 Maintaining Switches

Figure 11-4 Installing a power module

2

CON

ETH ACT RUN/ALM

CLK2

CLK1

RST

CON

ETH ACT RUN/ALM

CLK2

CLK1

RST

1

RUN/ALM

ON

RUN

3

ALM

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10 11

12 13

14 15

16 17

18 19

20 21

22 23

24 25

28 29

26 27

30 31

32 33

34 35

36 37

38 39

40 41

42 43

44 75

46 47

FAULT

OFF

PWR6 PWR5 CMU PWR4

RS485

RS485

ACT

ACT

RUN/ALM

RUN/ALM

PWR3 PWR2 PWR1

lb）

MON

kg（165

MON

≤75

CMUA ON ON ON

RUN

RUN

FAULT

FAULT

CMUA

RUN ALM

ALM

ALM

FAULT

1

2

OFF

OFF

OFF

ON

RUN ALM FAULT

OFF

Step 7 Connect power cables according to 7.1.1 Connecting DC Power Cables or 7.1.2 Connecting AC Power Cables. Step 8 Turn on the corresponding circuit breaker in the power distribution cabinet to power on the new power module. Step 9 Verify the functions of the new power module. Turn on the new power module and check whether the power module functions normally. l

Observe the RUN status indicator on the power module. If the indicator is steady green, the power module is working normally. If the indicator turns red, the power module does not work normally.

l

Run the display device command to check the running status of the power module.

If the new power module does not work normally, contact the equipment supplier for technical support. ----End

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

149

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

11 Maintaining Switches

Follow-up Procedure After replacing the power module, collect all tools. If the old power module is faulty, fill in the Repair Transmission Sheet and send the faulty module with the Repair Transmission Sheet to the equipment supplier or the specified repair service provider.

11.2 Replacing a Fan Module Context

CAUTION Be careful of the heat on a fan module when replacing it.

NOTICE l When a fan module fails, the system generates an alarm message, which provides the slot ID of the faulty fan module. Find the faulty fan module according to the slot ID and replace the fan module. l Install a new fan module in the slot within 3 minutes after a fan module is removed. Fan module slots are numbered from top to bottom, starting with FAN1. For example, on an S9312 switch, the first fan module slot on the top is FAN1, and the other fan module slots are FAN2, FAN3, and FAN4 from top to bottom. See Figure 11-5.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

150

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

11 Maintaining Switches

Figure 11-5 Fan slot numbers on the S9312

FAN1

FAN2

FAN3

FAN4

Tools l

ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves

l

Phillips screwdriver

Procedure Step 1 Find the fan module to be replaced. Before removing a fan module, determine in which cabinet and chassis the fan module is installed, find the fan module in the chassis, and attach a label on the panel of the fan module to avoid misoperation. Step 2 Wear an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves. When wearing an ESD wrist strap, insert the other end in the ESD jack of a device and ensure that the device is reliably grounded. Step 3 Remove the old fan module from the chassis. 1.

Loosen the four captive screws counterclockwise on both sides of the fan module with a Phillips screwdriver. See callout 1 in Figure 11-6.

2.

Hold the fan module with both hands and gently pull out the fan module. See callout 2 in Figure 11-6.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

151

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

11 Maintaining Switches

Figure 11-6 Removing a fan module

2

N CAUTIO

keep fingers moving parts, Hazardous away. body parts ʽ and other

Ϲ⽕೼亢᠛ᮟ

䕀ᯊ᥹㾺᠛义

1 RUN/ALM

N CAUTIO

keep fingers moving parts, Hazardous away. body parts ʽ and other

Ϲ⽕೼亢᠛ᮟ

䕀ᯊ᥹㾺᠛义

RUN/ALM

N CAUTIO keep moving parts, Hazardous away. body parts and other

Ϲ⽕೼亢᠛ᮟ

fingers

䕀ᯊ᥹㾺᠛义

ʽ

RUN/ALM

N CAUTIO

keep fingers moving parts, Hazardous away. body parts ʽ and other

Ϲ⽕೼亢᠛ᮟ

䕀ᯊ᥹㾺᠛义

RUN/ALM

≤75

kg（165

lb）

Step 4 Install the spare fan module in the chassis. 1.

Hold the fan module by two sides, align the holes on the baffle with the positioning pins on the chassis, and attach the fan module onto the chassis. See callout 1 in Figure 11-7.

2.

Tighten the captive screws clockwise with a Phillips screwdriver to secure the fan module on the chassis. See callout 2 in Figure 11-7.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

152

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

11 Maintaining Switches

Figure 11-7 Installing a fan module

Positioning pin

1

N

CAUTIO

keep fingers moving parts, Hazardous away. body parts ʽ and other

Ϲ⽕೼亢᠛ᮟ

䕀ᯊ᥹㾺᠛义

2

RUN/ALM

CAUTIO

N

keep fingers moving parts, Hazardous away. body parts ʽ and other

Ϲ⽕೼亢᠛ᮟ

䕀ᯊ᥹㾺᠛义

RUN/ALM

N

CAUTIO

keep moving parts, Hazardous away. body parts and other

Ϲ⽕೼亢᠛ᮟ

fingers

䕀ᯊ᥹㾺᠛义

ʽ

RUN/ALM

N

CAUTIO

keep fingers moving parts, Hazardous away. body parts ʽ and other

Ϲ⽕೼亢᠛ᮟ

䕀ᯊ᥹㾺᠛义

RUN/ALM

Step 5 Verify the functions of the new fan module. After the new fan module is installed, fans run at 40% of the full speed for about 10s. Then the fan module works in intelligent fan speed adjustment mode. Use either of the following methods to check whether the new fan module is functioning normally: l

Observe the indicator on the fan module. If the indicator blinks green slowly, the fan module is working normally. If the indicator turns red, the fan module is not working normally.

l

Run the display fan command to check the running status of the fan module.

If the new fan module does not work normally, contact the equipment supplier for technical support. ----End

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

153

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

11 Maintaining Switches

Follow-up Procedure After replacing the fan module, collect all tools. If the replaced fan module is faulty, fill in the Repair Transmission Sheet and send the faulty module with the Repair Transmission Sheet to the equipment supplier or the specified repair service provider.

11.3 Replacing a Service Card Context Replace a card if the card fails or the equipment needs a hardware upgrade.

Tools l

ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves

l

Tweezers (delivered with the switch)

l

Phillips screwdriver

Procedure Step 1 Wear an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves. When wearing an ESD wrist strap, insert the other end in the ESD jack of a device and ensure that the device is reliably grounded. Step 2 Select a spare card of the same type as the old card. If the spare card is different from the old one, ensure that it can replace the old card. Make sure that no components on the new card are damaged or missing. Record the bar code on the new card, which will be used for future repair service. Step 3 Record the cable locations on the old card and check whether the labels on the cables are correct and legible. If any labels are illegible, make and attach new labels to the cables to ensure correct cable connection on the new card. Step 4 Remove cables from the old card. NOTE

l To remove a cable, release the handle or locking clips on the cable connector, gently push the cable connector by holding the handle or locking clips, and then unplug the cable. l If many cables are connected to a card, use the tweezers delivered with the switch to remove the cables.

Step 5 Remove the card. 1.

Rotate the ejector levers outward to release the card from the backplane. See callout 1 in Figure 11-8. NOTE

If the card to be replaced is secured in the slot with captive screws, loosen the captive screws first.

2.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Grasp the ejector levers and pull out the card slowly along with the guide rails. See callout 2 in Figure 11-8.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

154

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

11 Maintaining Switches

NOTICE Pull the card along the guide rails in the slot. Otherwise, the card may collide with components on adjacent cards, causing damage to the components. NOTE

The methods for replacing different types of cards are the same. This section uses a Line Processing Unit (LPU) as an example.

Figure 11-8 Removing a card

2

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10 11

1

ETH

CON CLK1

ACT RUN/ALM

CLK2 RST

ETH

CON CLK1

ACT RUN/ALM

CLK2 RST

RUN/ALM

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

12 13

10 11

14 15

16 17

18 19

20 21

22 23

24 25

26 27

28 29

30 31

32 33

34 35

36 37

38 39

40 41

42 43

44 75

46 47

PWR6 PWR5 CMU PWR4 PWR3

RS485

RS485

ACT

ACT

RUN/ALM

RUN/ALM

PWR2 PWR1

lb）

MON

kg（165

MON

≤75

CMUA ON ON ON ON

RUN

FAULT

RUN

FAULT

RUN

FAULT

CMUA

RUN ALM

ALM

ALM

ALM

FAULT

1

2

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

Step 6 Install the spare card. For details, see 6.4 Installing a Card. Step 7 Install optical modules or network cables in accordance with the recorded connections. See 7.2 Connecting Network Cables, 7.3 Connecting High-Speed Cables, or 7.4 Installing Optical Modules and Connecting Optical Fibers. Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

155

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

11 Maintaining Switches

Step 8 Observe the RUN/ALM indicator on the new card. NOTE

It takes less than 5 minutes for the card to start and register.

l

If the RUN/ALM indicator blinks green fast, the card is starting.

l

If the RUN/ALM indicator blinks green slowly, the card is running normally.

Step 9 Verify the functions of the new card. After installing a new card, check whether the card is functioning normally: l

If the RUN/ALM indicator is steady red, the card is functioning abnormally.

l

Run the display device command to check the running status of the new card.

----End

11.4 Replacing an MPU 11.4.1 Replacing the Only MPU on a Switch (Services Are Interrupted) Context If the only MPU on a switch is faulty, the replacement procedure varies depending on whether the MPU has completely or partially failed: l

If the MPU has completely failed, services on the switch are interrupted and the command line interface (CLI) cannot be used.

l

If the MPU has partially failed, services are still running and you can run commands on the CLI.

NOTICE l If the old MPU is equipped with a subcard or daughter card, install a subcard or daughter card of the same type on the new MPU. l If the services on the old MPU are interrupted and operations cannot be performed on the CLI, perform the following operations after the replacement: l

Check the software version of the new MPU. Ensure that the software version of the new MPU is the same as that of the old MPU or is the required version.

l

Reconfigure services on the new MPU.

l Do not touch the electronic components on an MPU. Install or remove an MPU slowly and horizontally. l Format the replaced CF card or the CF card on an MPU that is scrapped or returned for repair.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

156

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

11 Maintaining Switches

Tools l

ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves

l

Phillips screwdriver

Procedure Step 1 Enter the BIOS menu on the MPU from the serial port and copy the configuration file and license file from the MPU to a computer. l

If the configuration file and license file are successfully copied to the computer, perform steps 2 to 11.

l

If the configuration file and license file fail to be copied to the computer, perform steps 2 to 10.

Step 2 Wear an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves. When wearing an ESD wrist strap, insert the other end in the ESD jack of a device and ensure that the device is reliably grounded. Step 3 Take out the new MPU from the package, and make sure that no components on the new MPU are damaged or missing. Step 4 Record the cable locations on the old MPU and check whether the labels on the cables are correct and legible. If any labels are illegible, make and attach new labels to the cables to ensure correct cable connection on the new card. Step 5 Remove cables from the old MPU. NOTE

l To remove a cable, release the handle or locking clips on the cable connector, gently push the cable connector by holding the handle or locking clips, and then unplug the cable. l If many cables are connected to a card, use the tweezers delivered with the switch to remove the cables.

Step 6 Pull the old MPU out of the slot. For details, see 11.3 Replacing a Service Card. Step 7 (Optional) Remove the subcard from the old MPU and install it on the new MPU. For details on how to install the subcard, see 6.2 (Optional) Installing a CSS Subcard or an Enhanced Flexible Service Subcard or 6.3 (Optional) Installing a CKM Daughter Card. If the old MPU has a subcard installed, install a subcard of the same type on the new MPU. Ensure that the subcard installed on the new MPU can work normally. Step 8 Install the new MPU in the chassis. For the installation procedure, see 11.3 Replacing a Service Card. NOTE

The system software version on the new MPU must be the same as that on the old MPU.

Step 9 View the RUN/ALM indicator on the new MPU. NOTE

After the new MPU is installed in the chassis, it starts and registers automatically. The start and registration process takes less than 5 minutes.

l

If the RUN/ALM indicator blinks green fast, the MPU is starting.

l

If the RUN/ALM indicator blinks green slowly, the MPU is running normally.

Step 10 Connect cables to the correct ports on the new MPU in accordance with the labels on the cables. Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

157

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

11 Maintaining Switches

Step 11 (Optional) If the configuration file has been copied from the old MPU, upload the configuration file to the new MPU. ----End

Follow-up Procedure 1.

2.

The CF card on an MPU saves important data, such as configuration data and system logs. To ensure data security, format the following CF card: –

CF card on a scrapped MPU

–

CF card on an MPU that will be returned for repair

–

Old CF card replaced by a new one

Verify the functions of the new MPU. –

Run the display device command to check the running status of the new MPU.

–

Run the display startup command to view the system software name and configuration file name for next startup. The file names on the new MPU must be the same as those on the old MPU. NOTE

The network monitoring engineers or system maintenance engineers can configure the software using the CLI.

11.4.2 Replacing the Only MPU on a Switch (Services Are Still Running) Context If the only MPU on a switch is faulty, the replacement procedure varies depending on whether the MPU has completely or partially failed: l

If the MPU has completely failed, services on the switch are interrupted and the command line interface (CLI) cannot be used.

l

If the MPU has partially failed, services are still running and you can run commands on the CLI.

NOTICE l If the old MPU is equipped with a subcard or daughter card, install a subcard or daughter card of the same type on the new MPU. l Do not touch the electronic components on an MPU. Install or remove an MPU slowly and horizontally. l After the new MPU is installed and powered on, it automatically synchronizes the system software from the active MPU. l Format the replaced CF card or the CF card on an MPU that is scrapped or returned for repair.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

158

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

11 Maintaining Switches

Tools l

ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves

l

Phillips screwdriver

Procedure Step 1 Wear an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves. When wearing an ESD wrist strap, insert the other end in the ESD jack of a device and ensure that the device is reliably grounded. Step 2 Take out the new MPU from the package, and make sure that no components on the new MPU are damaged or missing. Step 3 (Optional) Install a subcard on the new MPU. For the installation procedure, see 6.2 (Optional) Installing a CSS Subcard or an Enhanced Flexible Service Subcard or 6.3 (Optional) Installing a CKM Daughter Card. If the old MPU has a subcard installed, install a subcard of the same type on the new MPU. Ensure that the subcard installed on the new MPU can work normally. Step 4 Install the new MPU into the slot for the standby MPU. For the installation procedure, see 11.3 Replacing a Service Card. Step 5 View the RUN/ALM indicator on the new MPU. NOTE

After the new MPU is installed in the chassis, it starts and registers automatically. The start and registration process takes less than 5 minutes.

l

If the RUN/ALM indicator blinks green fast, the MPU is starting.

l

If the RUN/ALM indicator blinks green slowly, the MPU is running normally.

Step 6 Run the dir command to check whether the sizes of files (such as the configuration file) on the new MPU are the same as those on the old MPU. l

If the file sizes are the same, the file synchronization is successful. Go to Step 8.

l

If the file sizes on the two MPUs are different, go to Step 7 to manually synchronize the files to the new MPU.

Step 7 (Optional) Save data. 1.

Log in to the switch.

2.

Copy the configuration file to the standby MPU using either of the following methods: –

Method 1: Run the following command: copy cfcard:/XXX.cfg slave#cfcard:/XXX.cfg NOTE

XXX.cfg is the configuration file name.

–

Method 2: Run the save command on the client to save the configuration file to the standby MPU.

3.

Copy the license file to the standby MPU. copy cfcard:/XXX.dat slave#cfcard:/XXX.dat NOTE

XXX.dat is the license file name. Skip this step if there is no license file in the system.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

159

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

11 Maintaining Switches

Step 8 Run the startup saved-configuration command to specify the configuration file for the standby MPU to use at the next startup. Step 9 Run the slave switchover command to trigger an active/standby switchover. Step 10 Run the display switchover state command to check the active/standby switchover state. When the Switchover State field displays Ready, the switchover is complete. Go to the next step. Step 11 Record the cable locations on the old MPU and check whether the labels on the cables are correct and legible. If any labels are illegible, make and attach new labels to the cables to ensure correct cable connection on the new MPU. Step 12 Remove cables from the old MPU. NOTE

l To remove a cable, release the handle or locking clips on the cable connector, gently push the cable connector by holding the handle or locking clips, and then unplug the cable. l If many cables are connected to a card, use the tweezers delivered with the switch to remove the cables.

Step 13 Pull the old MPU out of the slot. For details, see 11.3 Replacing a Service Card. Step 14 Connect cables to the correct ports on the new MPU in accordance with the labels on the cables. ----End

Follow-up Procedure 1.

2.

The CF card on an MPU saves important data, such as configuration data and system logs. To ensure data security, format the following CF card: –

CF card on a scrapped MPU

–

CF card on an MPU that will be returned for repair

–

Old CF card replaced by a new one

Verify the functions of the new MPU. –

Run the display device command to check the running status of the new MPU.

–

Run the display startup command to view the system software name and configuration file name for next startup. The file names on the new MPU must be the same as those on the old MPU. NOTE

The network monitoring engineers or system maintenance engineers can configure the software using the CLI.

11.4.3 Replacing One of the MPUs on a Switch

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

160

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

11 Maintaining Switches

Context

NOTICE l Check whether the MPU to be replaced is the active or standby MPU on the switch. If it is the active MPU, perform an active/standby switchover. If it is the standby MPU, replace it directly. l You can only replace a faulty or standby MPU on a switch. Do not replace the active MPU that is running normally (with the ACT indicator steady green). l If the old MPU is equipped with a subcard or daughter card, install a subcard or daughter card of the same type on the new MPU. l Do not touch the electronic components on an MPU. Install or remove an MPU slowly and horizontally. l After the new MPU is installed and powered on, it automatically synchronizes the system software from the active MPU. l Format the replaced CF card or the CF card on an MPU that is scrapped or returned for repair.

Tools l

ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves

l

Phillips screwdriver

Procedure Step 1 Wear an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves. When wearing an ESD wrist strap, insert the other end in the ESD jack of a device and ensure that the device is reliably grounded. Step 2 Take out the new MPU from the package, and make sure that no components on the new MPU are damaged or missing. Step 3 (Optional) Install a subcard on the new MPU. For the installation procedure, see 6.2 (Optional) Installing a CSS Subcard or an Enhanced Flexible Service Subcard or 6.3 (Optional) Installing a CKM Daughter Card. If the old MPU has a subcard installed, install a subcard of the same type on the new MPU. Ensure that the subcard installed on the new MPU can work normally. Step 4 (Optional) If the MPU to be replaced is the active MPU, run the slave switchover command to perform an active/standby switchover. Run the display switchover state command to check the active/standby switchover state. When the Switchover State field displays Ready, the switchover is complete. Go to the next step. Step 5 Record the cable locations on the old MPU and check whether the labels on the cables are correct and legible. If any labels are illegible, make and attach new labels to the cables to ensure correct cable connection on the new card. Step 6 Remove cables from the old MPU. Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

161

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

11 Maintaining Switches

NOTE

l To remove a cable, release the handle or locking clips on the cable connector, gently push the cable connector by holding the handle or locking clips, and then unplug the cable. l If many cables are connected to a card, use the tweezers delivered with the switch to remove the cables.

Step 7 Remove the old MPU and install the new MPU into the slot. For details on how to remove the MPU, see 11.3 Replacing a Service Card. Step 8 View the RUN/ALM indicator on the new MPU. NOTE

After the new MPU is installed in the chassis, it starts and registers automatically. The start and registration process takes less than 5 minutes.

l

If the RUN/ALM indicator blinks green fast, the MPU is starting.

l

If the RUN/ALM indicator blinks green slowly, the MPU is running normally.

Step 9 Connect cables to the correct ports on the new MPU in accordance with the labels on the cables. Step 10 Run the dir command to check whether the names and sizes of files (such as the configuration file) on the new MPU are the same as those on the old MPU. l

If the file names and sizes are the same, the file synchronization is successful. Go to Step 12.

l

If the file names or sizes on the two MPUs are different, go to Step 11 to manually synchronize the files to the new MPU.

Step 11 (Optional) Save data. 1.

Log in to the switch.

2.

Copy the configuration file to the new MPU using either of the following methods: Method 1:

–

Run the following command: copy cfcard:/XXX.cfg slave#cfcard:/XXX.cfg NOTE

XXX.cfg is the configuration file name.

Method 2:

–

Run the save command on the client to save the configuration file to the standby MPU. 3.

Copy the license file to the standby MPU. copy cfcard:/XXX.dat slave#cfcard:/XXX.dat NOTE

XXX.dat is the license file name. Skip this step if there is no license file in the system.

Step 12 Run the startup saved-configuration command to specify the configuration file for the standby MPU to use at the next startup. ----End

Follow-up Procedure 1.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

The CF card on an MPU saves important data, such as configuration data and system logs. To ensure data security, format the following CF card: Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

162

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

2.

–

CF card on a scrapped MPU

–

CF card on an MPU that will be returned for repair

–

Old CF card replaced by a new one

11 Maintaining Switches

Verify the functions of the new MPU. –

Run the display device command to check the running status of the new MPU.

–

Run the display startup command to view the system software name and configuration file name for next startup. The file names on the new MPU must be the same as those on the old MPU. NOTE

The network monitoring engineers or system maintenance engineers can configure the software using the CLI.

11.5 Replacing an Optical Module Context

DANGER When replacing an optical module, do not look into bores of the optical module without eye protection. The laser emitted from the bores may injure your eyes.

NOTICE l Install or remove optical fibers carefully to avoid damage to fiber connectors. l Optical modules are electrostatic-sensitive components; therefore, you must take ESD protective measures when replacing optical modules. l Do not insert an optical module backwards. If an optical module cannot be completely inserted into an optical port, do not force it into the port. Turn the optical module over and try again. Observe the following rules to replace an optical module: l

Wear an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves when replacing the optical module.

l

Ensure that the new optical module has the same center wavelength and complies with the same standards as the old one.

l

Before removing an optical module, unplug optical fibers from the optical module. Do not apply too much force when unplugging optical fibers. Otherwise, the optical module may be damaged.

l

After removing optical fibers from optical modules, cover the ports of cards and bores of optical modules with dust plugs.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

163

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

11 Maintaining Switches

Tools and Accessories l

ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves

l

Dust caps

l

Dust plugs

l

Alcohol swab

Procedure Step 1 Wear an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves. When wearing an ESD wrist strap, insert the other end in the ESD jack of a device and ensure that the device is reliably grounded. Step 2 Record optical fiber locations on the old optical module and check whether the labels on the optical fibers are correct and legible. If any labels are illegible, make and attach new labels to the cables to ensure correct fiber connection on the new optical module. Step 3 Release the locking clip on the fiber connector, gently push the fiber connector, and then pull out the optical fiber. After removing optical fibers from the optical module, cover fiber connectors with dust caps. The locking clip varies on different fiber connectors. Figure 11-9 shows the locking clips on an LC/PC connector. Hold down the locking clips when pulling the optical fibers. Figure 11-10 shows the locking clip on an MPO connector. The locking clip is released automatically when you pull the MPO connector. Figure 11-9 LC/PC connector

Figure 11-10 MPO connector

Step 4 Release the latch of the optical module, gently push the optical module, and then pull it out. Cover the bores of the optical module with dust plugs. Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

164

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

11 Maintaining Switches

The latch varies on different optical modules. Figure 11-11 shows an optical module with a clasp latch. To release the clasp latch, rotate it down. Figure 11-12 shows an optical module with a tab latch. The tab latch is released when you pull it. Figure 11-11 Optical module with a clasp latch

Figure 11-12 Optical module with a tab latch

Step 5 Take out the new optical module from the package. Slowly insert the optical module into the optical port until you hear a click. NOTE

The new optical module must have the same optical parameters as the remote optical module connected to it.

Step 6 Find the optical fibers to be connected to the optical module according to labels on the optical fibers. Remove the dust caps from the fiber connectors and insert the optical fibers to bores of the optical module. NOTE

If the optical module does not work, use an alcohol swab to wipe the fiber connectors in one direction, and then connect the optical fibers to the optical module again.

----End

11.6 Replacing an Air Filter Context To prevent the air filter of a switch from being blocked by dust and to ensure efficient heat dissipation of a switch, periodically replace the air filter. It is recommended that you replace Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

165

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

11 Maintaining Switches

an air filter at least once every six months. When a switch is used in a dusty environment, replace its air filter more frequently. NOTE

The methods for replacing the air filters on different models are the same. This section uses S9312E as an example to describe the replacement procedure.

Tools l

Phillips screwdriver

l

ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves

Procedure Step 1 Determine in which cabinet and chassis the air filter is installed, find the air filter in the chassis, and attach a label on the air filter to avoid misoperation. Step 2 Wear an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves. When wearing an ESD wrist strap, insert the other end in the ESD jack of a device and ensure that the device is reliably grounded. Step 3 Remove the air filter. 1.

Use a Phillips screwdriver to loosen the captive screws on the air filter. See callout 1 in Figure 11-13.

2.

Slowly pull the air filter out. See callout 2 in Figure 11-13.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

166

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

11 Maintaining Switches

Figure 11-13 Removing an air filter

1

2 N CAUTIO

keep fingers moving parts, Hazardous away. body parts ʽ and other

Ϲ⽕೼亢᠛ᮟ

䕀ᯊ᥹㾺᠛义

RUN/ALM

N

CAUTIO

keep fingers moving parts, Hazardous away. body parts ʽ and other

Ϲ⽕೼亢᠛ᮟ

䕀ᯊ᥹㾺᠛义

RUN/ALM

N

CAUTIO

keep moving parts, Hazardous away. body parts

and other

Ϲ⽕೼亢᠛ᮟ

fingers

䕀ᯊ᥹㾺᠛义

ʽ

RUN/ALM

N CAUTIO

keep fingers moving parts, Hazardous away. body parts ʽ

and other

Ϲ⽕೼亢᠛ᮟ

䕀ᯊ᥹㾺᠛义

RUN/ALM

≤75

kg（165

lb）

Step 4 (Optional) For an S9300 chassis, replace the sponge on the air filter. For an S9300E chassis, replace the air filter. Step 5 Install the air filter. 1.

Slowly insert the air filter into the chassis. See callout 1 in Figure 11-14.

2.

Tighten the captive screws on the filter with the Phillips screwdriver. See callout 2 in Figure 11-14.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

167

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

11 Maintaining Switches

Figure 11-14 Installing an air filter

2

1 CAUTIO

N

keep fingers moving parts, Hazardous away. body parts ʽ and other

Ϲ⽕೼亢᠛ᮟ

䕀ᯊ᥹㾺᠛义

RUN/ALM

CAUTIO

N

keep fingers moving parts, Hazardous away. body parts ʽ and other

Ϲ⽕೼亢᠛ᮟ

䕀ᯊ᥹㾺᠛义

RUN/ALM

CAUTIO

N

keep moving parts, Hazardous away. body parts

and other

Ϲ⽕೼亢᠛ᮟ

fingers

䕀ᯊ᥹㾺᠛义

ʽ

RUN/ALM

CAUTIO

N

keep fingers moving parts, Hazardous away. body parts ʽ

and other

Ϲ⽕೼亢᠛ᮟ

䕀ᯊ᥹㾺᠛义

RUN/ALM

≤75

kg（165

lb）

----End

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

168

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

12

12 Hardware Troubleshooting

Hardware Troubleshooting

About This Chapter 12.1 A Card Resets Unexpectedly 12.2 A Card Fails to Register 12.3 Files Cannot Be Written into the CF Card 12.4 A Power Module Does Not Work Normally

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

169

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

12 Hardware Troubleshooting

12.1 A Card Resets Unexpectedly Fault Description A device generates card reset alarms.

Possible Causes and Troubleshooting Procedure Run the display reset-reason command to check the reason why a card is reset. Table 12-1 lists common reasons of card resets and solutions. Table 12-1 Common reasons for card resets and solutions Solution

Reason System loading

Reset for patch get state fail Reset for patch load file fail Reset for patch synchronize file fail Reset for patch state compare fail

User operation s

l It is normal when such resets occur one or two times during system startup. l When such resets occur multiple times, collect information, and obtain technical support through the Huawei Technical Support Website.

Reset slave board for memsize too little

Replace the slave MPU to ensure that the master and slave MPUs have the same memory size.

Reset for slave board's card statement disaccord with master's

One of the MPUs is equipped with a subcard. Remove the subcard or install a subcard of the same type on the other MPU.

Reset by user command

A user has reset the card using the command line interface or network management system. Confirm with this user about the reset.

Power off by user command VRP reset selfboard because of command Reset board by vrp cmd Reset board by snmp Reset for rollback

Software

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

The demo time of license is overtime

The temporary license loaded on the card has expired. Apply for a license from Huawei.

VRP reset selfboard because of find deadloop

Collect information, and obtain technical support through the Huawei Technical Support Website.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

170

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

Reason

12 Hardware Troubleshooting

Solution Board reset by VRP for schedule VRP reset selfboard because of find exception

Device managem ent

Reset for no receiving mpu's heart Reset for no heart Reset for not receiving register ack from mpu Reset for state not stable

Reinstall the card in the same slot or another slot. If the problem persists, collect information, and obtain technical support through the Huawei Technical Support Website.

Warm reset board for no register in a long time

Collect information, and obtain technical support through the Huawei Technical Support Website.

Warm reset board for no receiving message in a long time Cold reset board for no receiving message in a long time Cold reset board for CPU is not active Reset for unregister but receive heartbeat info Reset for slave board class disaccord with mpu

The master and slave MPUs are different models. Replace one of them to ensure that the two MPUs are the same model.

Reset for lpu or slave version disaccord with mpu

Collect information, and obtain technical support through the Huawei Technical Support Website.

Reset for no receiving master cpu's heart Compone nts

Reset for selftest fail Reset for CPLD self-test fail Reset selfboard because of initialize fsu fail

Remove and reinstall the card or install it in another slot. If the problem persists, collect information, and obtain technical support through the Huawei Technical Support Website.

Reset for fpga load failed Reset for fpga in abnormal state Reset for lanswitch chip parity error

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

171

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

Reason Temperat ure

12 Hardware Troubleshooting

Solution A card may reset when the operating temperature is too high.

1. Run the display temperature all command. In the command output, the Status field shows whether the chassis temperature is within the normal range, and the Temperature.(C) field displays the temperature of each component. If the Status field displays minor, go to step 2. 2. Check the heat dissipation system of the switch. Check the air intake, air exhaust, fan trays, and air filters to ensure that: l The air intakes (at the front and left side of the chassis) are not blocked. There is no other device on the left side of the switch or the adjacent device is separated by a side panel of the cabinet. l The air exhaust (at the rear of the chassis) is not blocked. Fans are running normally. l The air filters are clean and not blocked so that air can enter the chassis. If the card temperature falls within the normal range, the card can work normally. If the card temperature remains high, go to step 3. 3. Remove and reinstall the card, and check whether the card can register successfully. If the card fails to register, go to step 4. 4. Collect information, and obtain technical support through the Huawei Technical Support Website.

12.2 A Card Fails to Register Fault Description l

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

The card registration process lasts a long time, and the RUN/ALM indicator of the card is steady yellow. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

172

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

l

12 Hardware Troubleshooting

After the display device command is executed, the Register field of a card displays Unregistered.

Possible Causes This fault is commonly caused by one of the following: l

The card is not properly installed.

l

The card is not hot swappable but it has been unplugged and plugged while the power is on.

l

Alarms have been generated for electronic devices on the card.

l

The available power is insufficient for the card.

l

The card is not supported by the chassis model or software version.

l

The card connector has failed.

l

The card cannot load the software package because the configuration has not been cleared.

l

No startup file is saved in the CF card.

Troubleshooting Procedure 1.

Check whether the card is correctly installed. If not, reinstall the card. If the card is correctly installed, go to step 2.

2.

Check whether a subcard on the MPU has been hot swapped. If so, go to step 7. If not, go to step 3.

3.

Run the display alarm command to check alarms about the card. If the command output contains alarms about abnormal voltage or components, go to step 7. If not, go to step 4.

4.

Run the display power system command to check the power of the system and card. If the available system power is insufficient, go to step 7. If the available system power is sufficient, go to step 5. NOTE

An LE0DG48VEA00 card can successfully register only when the following conditions are met:

5.

l

A dual in-line memory module (DIMM) has been installed in the DIMM slot of the card.

l

The PoE interface card is installed in a PoE chassis.

l

The PoE power modules are supplying power to the chassis normally.

Run the display version command to check whether the model and version of the card match the chassis. If not, replace the card with a card matching the chassis. If the card matches the chassis, go to step 6. All cards are interchangeable on the S9300 and S9300E chassis except the following: LH2D2SRUDC00, LE2D2SRUDC00/LE2D2SRUDC01, LE0MSRUA, LE0DSRUA, LE0D00SRUB00, LH2D2MCUA000, LE0MMCUA, LE0D0VAMPA00, LE0DG48VEA00, LE0D0WMNPA00, and LE2D2X48SEC0. NOTE

If a card is moved from a chassis running a later version to a chassis running an earlier version, the BootROM and Bootload of the card may automatically change to the earlier version. As a result, the card cannot restart when it is reinstalled in the chassis running the later version. When this occurs, download the later-version software package from the Huawei official website, load the software package on the card, and then run the upgrade jtag slot slot-id command in the diagnostic view to update BootROM and Bootload to the later version.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

173

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

6.

12 Hardware Troubleshooting

Remove and reinstall the card or install it in another slot. Remove the card from the slot and check whether the card connector is intact. If the card connector is intact, install the card in the original slot. If the card still fails to register after being reinstalled several times, install it in another slot. If the problem persists, go to step 7. If there are idle pin holes on the card connector, use a flashlight to illuminate the card connector and check whether any pins are bent. If some pins are bent, go to step 7.

7.

Collect information, and obtain technical support through the Huawei Technical Support Website.

12.3 Files Cannot Be Written into the CF Card Fault Description Files cannot be saved to the CF card on the MPU.

Possible Causes This fault is commonly caused by one of the following: l

The CF card space is insufficient.

l

The CF card is damaged.

l

The file system is damaged.

Troubleshooting Procedure 1.

Check free space on the CF card. Run the dir command in the user view to check whether the CF card has sufficient free space. If free space on the CF card is insufficient for the file to be saved, copy the log files on the CF card to the local storage device, and then delete the log files from the CF card to free up the space. If free space on the CF card is sufficient for the file to be saved, the CF card may be damaged. Go to step 3.

2.

Run the format command to format the CF card. If the problem persists after the CF card is formatted, go to step 3.

3.

Replace the CF card. NOTE

Use a Huawei-certified CF card.

If the problem persists after the CF card is replaced, go to step 4. 4.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Collect information, and obtain technical support through the Huawei Technical Support Website.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

174

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

12 Hardware Troubleshooting

12.4 A Power Module Does Not Work Normally Fault Description The device generates a power module alarm, and the RUN or INPUT indicator on the power module is off.

Possible Causes and Troubleshooting Procedure

DANGER Protect yourself from electric shock when you are touching a power module. Analyze the cause of the fault according to keywords in the alarm message and indicator status on the power module. Run the display alarm { all | slot slot-id } command to check alarms about the faulty power module. 800 W AC power module, 2200 W DC power module, and 2200 W AC power module Table 12-2 describes keywords in alarms about an 800 W AC power module, 2200 W DC power module, and 2200 W AC power module, indicator status on these power modules, and troubleshooting methods in different situations. Table 12-2 Power module alarm keywords Alarm Keyword

Possible Indicator Status

Description

Solution

PWR_FAUL T

l The RUN indicator is off.

General power module alarm.

1. Run the display device command to check whether the CMU is working normally. If the CMU is not working normally, see A Card Fails to Register to handle the problem. If the problem persists, go to step 5. If the CMU recovers, go to step 2. 2. Check whether the input voltage of the power module is normal. Use a multimeter to measure the voltage of the external power source.

l The ALM indicator is steady yellow. l The ALM indicator is blinking yellow. l The FAULT indicator is steady red. Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

175

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

12 Hardware Troubleshooting

Alarm Keyword

Possible Indicator Status

Description

Solution

MODE_FAU LT

l The RUN indicator is off.

l Fans of the power module have failed.

l The ALM indicator is steady yellow.

l The output voltage of the power module exceeds the upper threshold.

Select DC voltage measurement on the multimeter and use the test probes to measure the voltage. If the input voltage of the power module is normal, check whether the power switch on the power module is turned on. If so, go to step 3. If the input voltage is out of the normal range, check the power cable connected to the power module and switch of the external power source. If the power cable and external power source are both working normally, go to step 3. 3. Reinstall the power module in the same slot and check whether the power module works normally. If the fault persists, go to step 4. 4. Install the power module in another slot and check whether the power module works normally. If the fault persists, go to step 5. 5. Collect information, and obtain technical support through the Huawei Technical Support Website.

l The ALM indicator is blinking yellow. l The FAULT indicator is steady red. MODE_PRO TECT

l The RUN indicator is off. l The ALM indicator is steady yellow. l The ALM indicator is blinking yellow.

l The output voltage of the power module is below the lower threshold.

l The circuit breaker of the power module is switched off. l The power module is in overtemperature protection state. l The power module is in overcurrent protection state. l The power module is in overvoltage protection state. l The power module is in undervoltage protection state.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

176

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

12 Hardware Troubleshooting

Alarm Keyword

Possible Indicator Status

Description

Solution

DROP

l The RUN indicator is off.

The power module encountered a power failure.

Check whether the power cable connected to the power module is loose. If so, connect the power cable properly. If not, replace the power cable.

Fans of the power module have failed.

1. Reinstall the power module in the same slot and check whether the power module works normally. If the fault persists, go to step 2.

l The ALM indicator is blinking yellow. FAN_FAULT

l The RUN indicator is off. l The ALM indicator is blinking yellow. l The FAULT indicator is steady red.

2. Install the power module in another slot and check whether the power module works normally. If the fault persists, go to step 3. 3. Collect information, and obtain technical support through the Huawei Technical Support Website.

1600 W DC power module Table 12-3 describes the keywords in alarms about a 1600 W DC power module, indicator status on the power module, and troubleshooting methods in different situations.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

177

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

12 Hardware Troubleshooting

Table 12-3 Power module alarm keywords Alarm Keyword

Possible Indicator Status

Description

Solution

DC PWR_FAU LT

l The INPUT indicato r is off.

No input power is available.

1. Check that the input voltage of the power module is normal.

l The ALM indicato r is steady red.

Use a multimeter to measure the voltage of the external power source. Select DC voltage measurement on the multimeter and use the test probes to measure the voltage. If the input voltage of the power module is normal, check whether the power switch on the power module is turned on. If so, go to step 2. If the input voltage is out of the normal range, check the power cable connected to the power module and switch of the external power source. If the power cable and external power source are both working normally, go to step 2. 2. Reinstall the power module in the same slot. Check whether the power module works normally. If the fault persists, go to step 3. 3. Reinstall the power module in another slot. Check whether the power module works normally. If the fault persists, go to step 4. 4. Collect information, and obtain technical support through the Huawei Technical Support Website.

DC PWR_LAC K

l The INPUT indicato r is off. l The ALM indicato r is steady red.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

The input voltage of the power module is below the lower threshold.

Measure the voltage of the external power source. Ensure that the power source can supply power to the power module normally.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

178

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

12 Hardware Troubleshooting

Alarm Keyword

Possible Indicator Status

Description

Solution

DC SWITCH_ STA

l The INPUT indicato r is off.

The power module is turned off.

Check the power switch of the power module. If the power switch is turned off, turn it on.

The fuse of the power module is damaged.

1. Unplug and plug the CMU in the same CMU slot, and check whether the alarm is cleared. If the fault persists, go to step 2.

l The ALM indicato r is steady red. DC FUSE_FA ULT

The ALM indicator is steady red.

2. Install the CMU in the other CMU slot and check whether the alarm is cleared. If the fault persists, go to step 3. 3. Reinstall the power module in the same slot and check whether the power module works normally. If the fault persists, go to step 4. 4. Install the power module in another slot and check whether the power module works normally. If the fault persists, go to step 5. 5. Collect information, and obtain technical support through the Huawei Technical Support Website.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

179

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

13 Appendix

13

Appendix

About This Chapter 13.1 Appendix A List of Indicators 13.2 Appendix B On-site Cable Assembly and Installation 13.3 Appendix C Environmental Requirements for Device Operation 13.4 Appendix D Equipment Grounding Specifications 13.5 Appendix E Engineering Labels for Cables 13.6 Appendix F Guide to Using Optical Modules 13.7 Appendix G Fault Tag

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

180

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

13 Appendix

13.1 Appendix A List of Indicators Power Module Indicators Table 13-1 lists the indicators on power modules and describes the meaning of each indicator state. Table 13-1 Description of power module indicators Module

Indicator

Color

Description

l 800 W AC power module

RUN

Green

Steady on: The power input is normal.

l 2200 W AC power module (W2PSA 2230)

Off: The power module is experiencing an unrecoverable failure or has stopped supplying power due to overtemperature, input overvoltage, or input undervoltage. ALM

Yellow

Steady on: The power module has stopped supplying power due to overtemperature, input overvoltage, input undervoltage, or output overcurrent. Blinking: Communication with the monitoring device (MCU or CMU) has been interrupted.

l 2200 W DC power module

Off: The power module is working normally. FAULT

Red

Steady on: The power module is experiencing an unrecoverable failure. Off: The power module has no unrecoverable failure.

l 1600 W DC power module l 2400 W DC power module

INPUT

Green

Steady on: The input power is normal. Off: No input power is available.

OUTPUT

Green

Steady on: The output power of the power module is in the normal range. Off: The power module provides no output power.

ALARM

Red

Steady on: The protection circuit has failed. Off: The protection circuit is functioning normally.

MPU Indicators Table 13-2 lists the indicators on an MPU and describes the meaning of each indicator state. Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

181

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

13 Appendix

Table 13-2 Description of MPU indicators Indicator

Color

Description

RUN/ALM

Green

Steady on: The card has been powered on but the system software is not running. Slow blinking: The system software of the card is running normally. Fast blinking: The system software of the card is starting.

ACT

Red

Steady on: The card has failed.

Yellow

Steady on: The card is powered off.

Green

Steady on: The card is the active MPU of the switch. Off: The card is the standby MPU of the switch.

CMU Indicators Table 13-3 lists the indicators on an CMU and describes the meaning of each indicator state. Table 13-3 Description of CMU indicators Indicator

Color

Description

RUN/ALM

Green

Slow blinking: The card software is running properly. Fast blinking: The card software is unregistered.

Red

Steady on: The card has failed, and the fault requires manual intervention. Slow blinking: The switch is reporting an alarm. For example, a CMU, fan module, or power module on the switch fails. Fast blinking: The input power is insufficient.

ACT

Green

Steady on: The card is the active CMU. Off: The card is the standby CMU.

Service Card Indicators Table 13-4 lists the indicators on a service card and describes the meaning of each indicator state.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

182

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

13 Appendix

Table 13-4 Description of service card indicators Indicator

Color

Description

RUN/ALM

Green

Steady on: The card has been powered on but the system software is not running. Slow blinking: The system software of the card is running normally. Fast blinking: The system software of the card is starting.

Red

Steady on: The card has failed.

Yellow

Steady on: The card is powered off.

Fan Module Indicator Table 13-5 lists the indicator on a fan module and describes the meaning of each indicator state. Table 13-5 Description of fan module indicator Indicator

Color

Description

RUN/ALM

Green

Slow blinking: The fan module is working and communicating with the system normally. Fast blinking: The fan module is working normally but is not communicating with the system.

Red

Fast blinking: An alarm has been generated. You must check the fan module onsite to determine whether to replace it. Steady on: The fan module has a hardware failure and needs to be replaced.

13.2 Appendix B On-site Cable Assembly and Installation 13.2.1 Cable Assembly Precautions Checking the Appearance of Cables l

If the cable jacket or insulation is visibly dirty, clean it before assembly.

l

If the jacket or insulation of a cable has visible damage, irreparable scuffing, or other defects, do not use the cable.

l

If the shield layer of a cable is damaged, do not use the cable.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

183

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

l

13 Appendix

If the cable jacket or insulation cracks after the cable is bent or twisted, discard this cable and check whether other cables have the same problem. If other cables have the same problem, replace these cables.

Checking the Appearance of Connectors l

Do not use connectors with visible defects, damage, rust or scuffing.

l

Do not use connectors if their shells or pins have exposed part or uneven plating, or their pins are lost, broken, or bent.

l

Do not use connectors that have dirt on their pins or in their jacks or if there are conductors between pins or between pins and the shell.

Precautions for Assembly l

Use dedicated tools or tools delivered by Huawei and follow the methods given here during assembly.

l

Hold terminals of cables instead of pulling the cables themselves when installing or removing cable components.

l

Take the following precautions when cutting or stripping cables:

l

–

Make cables slightly longer than necessary.

–

Coil cables longer than 2 m (6.56 ft) after cutting. Bind and fasten the coils using bundling ropes. The inner diameters of the coils should be larger than 20 times the outer diameters of the cables.

–

When stripping the jackets of cables, avoid damaging the shield layers (braid or aluminum foil), insulation, core conductors, and other jackets that do not need to be stripped.

–

After assembling cables, cut all visible cross sections of jackets to ensure that the cross sections are arranged neatly.

–

Do not touch the core conductors of cables with your hands. Terminate exposed conductors in a timely way after stripping off insulation so that the surface of the conductors does not become oxidized.

Take the following precautions when crimping and connecting cables or connectors: –

The terminals and conductors should be connected tightly after they are crimped. They should not be moved or turned.

–

Cut all the exposed copper wires.

–

Try to avoid a second crimping of sleeves.

–

Keep all the conductors clean and aligned.

NOTE

The connectors, cables, and tools provided by different vendors may be different. The figures in this document are for your reference only.

13.2.2 Assembling Power Cables Assembling the OT Terminal and Power Cable Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

184

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

13 Appendix

Context Figure 13-1 shows the components of an OT terminal and a power cable. Figure 13-1 Components of an OT terminal and a power cable

A. Heat-shrinkable tubing

B. Bare crimping terminal

C. Insulation

D. Conductor

Procedure Step 1 Based on the cross-sectional area of the cable conductor, strip a length of insulation coating C to expose the conductor D of length L1, as shown in Figure 13-2. The recommended values of L1 are listed in Table 13-6. Figure 13-2 Stripping a power cable (OT terminal)

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

185

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

13 Appendix

NOTICE l When you strip a power cable, do not damage the conductor of the cable. l If the bare crimping terminal is not provided by Huawei, the value of L1 is 1 mm (0.04 in.) to 2 mm (0.08 in.) greater than the value of L.

Table 13-6 Mapping between the cross-sectional area of the conductor and the value of L1 CrossSectional Area of Conductor (mm2(in.2))

Value of L1 (mm(in.))

Cross-Sectional Area of Conductor (mm2(in.2))

Value of L1 (mm(in.))

1 (0.002)

7 (0.28)

10 (0.015)

11 (0.43)

1.5 (0.002)

7 (0.28)

16 (0.025)

13 (0.51)

2.5 (0.004)

7 (0.28)

25 (0.039)

14 (0.55)

4 (0.006)

8 (0.31)

35 (0.054)

16 (0.63)

6 (0.009)

9 (0.35)

50 (0.077)

16 (0.63)

NOTE

If you are proficient in assembling OT terminals and power cables, you can obtain the value of L1 by comparing the part to be crimped with the power cable.

Step 2 Put the heat-shrinkable (A) tubing onto the bare crimping terminal, as shown in Figure 13-3. Figure 13-3 Putting the heat shrink tubing onto the bare crimping terminal

Step 3 Put the OT terminal B onto the exposed conductor, and ensure that the OT terminal is in good contact with the insulation coating C, as shown in Figure 13-3. Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

186

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

13 Appendix

NOTICE After the conductor is fed into the OT terminal, the protruding part of the conductor, or L2 in Figure 13-3, must not be longer than 2 mm (0.08 in.). Step 4 Crimp the joint parts of the bare crimping terminal and the conductor, as shown in Figure 13-4. NOTE

The shapes of crimped parts may vary with the crimping dies.

Figure 13-4 Crimping the joint parts of the bare crimping terminal and the conductor (OT terminal)

Step 5 Push the heat shrink tubing (A) toward the connector until the tube covers the crimped part, and then use a heat gun to heat the tube, as shown in Figure 13-5. Figure 13-5 Heating the heat shrink tubing (OT terminal)

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

187

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

13 Appendix

NOTICE Stop heating the shrink tubing when the connector is securely locked in the shrink tubing. Do not heat the shrink tubing too long as this may damage the insulation coating. ----End

Assembling the JG Terminal and Power Cable Context Figure 13-6 shows the components of a JG terminal and a power cable. Figure 13-6 Components of a JG terminal and a power cable

A. JG terminal B. Heat-shrinkable tubing C. Insulation layer of a power cable

D. Conductor of a power cable

Procedure Step 1 Strip a part of the insulation to expose the cable conductor with a length of L, as shown in Figure 13-7. The recommended values of L are listed in Table 13-7.

NOTICE l When you strip a power cable, do not damage the conductor of the cable. l If the bare crimping terminal is not provided by Huawei, you can adjust the value of L as required.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

188

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

13 Appendix

Figure 13-7 Stripping a power cable (JG terminal)

Table 13-7 Mapping between the cross-sectional area of the conductor and the value of L Cross-Sectional Area of Conductor (mm2(in.2))

Value of L (mm(in.))

16 (0.025)

13 (0.51)

25 (0.039)

14 (0.55)

35 (0.054)

16 (0.63)

50 (0.077)

16 (0.63)

Step 2 Put the heat shrink tubing onto the bare crimping terminal, as shown in Figure 13-8. Figure 13-8 Putting the heat shrink tubing onto the bare crimping terminal

Step 3 Put the bare crimping terminal onto the exposed conductor, and ensure that the bare crimping terminal is in good contact with the insulation of the power cable, as shown in Figure 13-8. Step 4 Crimp the joint parts of the bare crimping terminal and the conductor, as shown in Figure 13-9. Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

189

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

13 Appendix

Figure 13-9 Crimping the joint parts of the bare crimping terminal and the conductor (JG terminal)

Step 5 Push the heat shrink tubing toward the connector until the tube covers the crimped part, and then use a heat gun to heat the tube, as shown in Figure 13-10. Figure 13-10 Heating the heat shrink tubing (JG terminal)

----End

Assembling the Cord End Terminal and the Power Cable Context Figure 13-11 shows the components of a cord end terminal and a power cable.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

190

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

13 Appendix

Figure 13-11 Components of a cord end terminal and a power cable

A. Cord end terminal

B. Insulation layer of a power cable

C. Conductor of a power cable

Procedure Step 1 Strip a part of the insulation to expose the cable conductor with a length of L1, as shown in Figure 13-12. The recommended values of L1 are listed in Table 13-8.

NOTICE When you strip a power cable, do not damage the conductor of the cable.

Figure 13-12 Stripping a power cable (cord end terminal)

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

191

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

13 Appendix

Table 13-8 Mapping between the cross-sectional area of the conductor and the value of L1 CrossSectional Area of Conductor (mm2(in.2))

Value of L1 (mm(in.))

Cross-Sectional Area of Conductor (mm2(in.2))

Value of L1 (mm(in.))

1 (0.002)

8 (0.31)

10 (0.015)

15 (0.59)

1.5 (0.002)

10 (0.39)

16 (0.025)

15 (0.59)

2.5 (0.004)

10 (0.39)

25 (0.039)

18 (0.71)

4 (0.006)

12 (0.47)

35 (0.054)

19 (0.75)

6 (0.009)

14 (0.55)

50 (0.077)

26 (1.02)

Step 2 Put the cord end terminal onto the conductor, and ensure that the conductor is aligned with the edge of the cord end terminal, as shown in Figure 13-13.

NOTICE After the conductor is fed into the cord end terminal, the protruding part of the conductor must not be longer than 1 mm (0.04 in.).

Figure 13-13 Putting the cord end terminal onto the conductor

Step 3 Crimp the joint parts of the cord end terminal and the conductor, as shown in Figure 13-14.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

192

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

13 Appendix

Figure 13-14 Crimping the cord end terminal and the conductor

Step 4 Check the maximum width of the tubular crimped terminal. The maximum width of a tubular crimped terminal is listed in Table 13-9. Table 13-9 Maximum width of a tubular crimped terminal Cross-Sectional Area of Tubular Terminal (mm2(in.2))

Maximum Width of Crimped Terminal W1 (mm(in.))

0.25 (0.0004)

1 (0.04)

0.5 (0.0008)

1 (0.04)

1.0 (0.0015)

1.5 (0.06)

1.5 (0.0023)

1.5 (0.06)

2.5 (0.0039)

2.4 (0.09)

4 (0.006)

3.1 (0.12)

6 (0.009)

4 (0.16)

10 (0.015)

5.3 (0.21)

16 (0.025)

6 (0.24)

25 (0.039)

8.7 (0.34)

35 (0.054)

10 (0.39)

----End

13.2.3 Assembling Ethernet Cables Assembling the Shielded RJ45 Connector and Ethernet Cable Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

193

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

13 Appendix

Context Figure 13-15 shows the components of an RJ45 connector and a shielded Ethernet cable. Figure 13-15 Shielded RJ45 connector and cable

A. Jacket of connector

B. Metal shell of connector

E. Jacket of Ethernet cable F. Shield layer of Ethernet cable

C. Wire holder of connector

D. Plug of connector

G. Twisted-pair wires

-

Procedure Step 1 Fit the jacket of the connector onto the Ethernet cable, as shown in Figure 13-16. Figure 13-16 Fitting the jacket of the connector onto the Ethernet cable

Step 2 Remove a 30 mm (1.18 in.) long section of the jacket, cut off the nylon twine inside the jacket, and cut a no more than 5 mm (0.20 in.) cleft in the jacket, as shown in Figure 13-17. Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

194

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

13 Appendix

NOTICE l When you remove a section of the jacket, do not damage the shield layer of the twistedpair cable. l When you remove the shield layer, do not damage the insulation of the twisted-pair cable.

Figure 13-17 Removing the jacket of a twisted-pair cable (unit: mm (in.))

Step 3 Fit the metal shell onto the twisted-pair cable. The shield layer is covered by the metal shell, as shown in Figure 13-18. Figure 13-18 Fitting the metal shell onto the twisted-pair cable

Step 4 Fit the metal shell onto the twisted-pair cable until the shield layer is covered completely. Along the edge of the metal shell, cut off the aluminum foil shield layer and ensure that there is no surplus copper wire. The exposed twisted-pair cable is about 20 mm (0.79 in.) long, as shown in Figure 13-19.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

195

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

13 Appendix

Figure 13-19 Removing the shield layer of a twisted-pair cable (unit: mm (in.))

Step 5 Lead the four pairs of twisted-pair wires through the wire holder, as shown in Figure 13-20 and Figure 13-21. Ensure that the colored wires are in the correct location in the cable. Figure 13-20 Leading wires through the wire holder

G C

Figure 13-21 Cable locations in a wire holder

White-Orange Orange

White-Green Green

Blue White-Blue

White-Brown Brown

Step 6 Align the four pairs of cables in the holder, as shown in Figure 13-22. The connections between the wires and the pins are shown in Figure 13-23 and listed in Table 13-10. Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

196

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

13 Appendix

Figure 13-22 Four pairs of cables on a wire holder

Figure 13-23 Connections between wires and pins White-Orange Orange White-Green Blue White-Blue Green White -Brown Brown

Pin 8 Pin 1

Table 13-10 Connections between wires and pins (using a straight-through cable as an example)

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Matching Pins of Wires

Wire Color

1

White-Orange

2

Orange

3

White-Green

4

Blue

5

White-Blue

6

Green

7

White-Brown Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

197

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

13 Appendix

Matching Pins of Wires

Wire Color

8

Brown

Step 7 Cut off the surplus cables along the lower edge of the wire holder, as shown in Figure 13-24. Figure 13-24 Cutting off surplus cables

Step 8 Put the connector body onto the wire holder and turn the metal shell by 90°, as shown in Figure 13-25. NOTE

Ensure that the wire holder is in good contact with the connector body.

Figure 13-25 Putting the connector body onto the wire holder

Step 9 Push the metal shell toward the connector body until the wire holder and the connector body are engaged completely. Crimp the connector, as shown in Figure 13-26.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

198

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

13 Appendix

Figure 13-26 Crimping the connector

Step 10 Push the jacket towards the metal shell until the metal shell is covered. This completes the assembly of one end of the cable, as shown in Figure 13-27. Figure 13-27 Pushing the metal shell

Step 11 To complete the assembly of the other end, repeat Step 1 through Step 10. ----End

Assembling an Unshielded RJ45 Connector and Ethernet Cable Context Figure 13-28 shows the components of an unshielded RJ45 connector and cable.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

199

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

13 Appendix

Figure 13-28 Components of an unshielded RJ45 connector and cable

A

B C A. Plug of connector

B. Jacket

C. Twisted-pair wires

Procedure Step 1 Remove a 16-mm (0.63 in.) long section of the jacket, as shown in Figure 13-29.

NOTICE When you remove the shield layer, do not damage the insulation of the twisted-pair cable.

Figure 13-29 Removing the jacket of a twisted-pair cable (unit: mm (in.))

Step 2 Align the four pairs of wires and cut the ends neatly, as shown in Figure 13-30. The connections between the wires and the pins are listed in Table 13-11. Figure 13-30 Connections between wires and pins (unit: mm (in.))

Pin 8 Pin 1

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

White-Orange Orange White-Green Blue White-Blue Green White-Brown Brown

C

16

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

200

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

13 Appendix

Table 13-11 Connections between wires and pins (using a straight-through cable as an example) Matching Pins of Wires

Wire Color

1

White-Orange

2

Orange

3

White-Green

4

Blue

5

White-Blue

6

Green

7

White-Brown

8

Brown

Step 3 Feed the cable into the plug, and crimp the connector, as shown in Figure 13-31. NOTE

When inserting the cable, check from the side or bore of the plug to ensure that the cable is completely seated in the plug.

Figure 13-31 Crimping the connector

Step 4 To complete the assembly of the other end, repeat Step 1 through Step 3. ----End

Checking the Appearance of Contact Strips Context l

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

To ensure proper contact between the crimped wires and the wire conductors, the heights and sizes of the contact strips must be standard and the same. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

201

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

13 Appendix

l

The contact strips must be parallel to each other, with an offset of less than ± 5°. The top margin of a strip must be parallel to the axis of the connector, with an offset of less than ± 10°.

l

To ensure conductivity, the surface of the contact strips must be clean.

l

The contact strips must be in good contact with the RJ45 socket. The plastic separators must remain intact and be aligned.

l

The contact strip blade must extend beyond the ends of the wires. The ends of the wires must be in contact with the edge of the RJ45. The distance between them must be less than 0.5 mm (0.02 in.).

Procedure Step 1 Hold the crimped connector, with the front side facing you, and check whether the contact strips are of the same height. The height should be 6.02 ± 0.13 mm (0.237 ± 0.005). If a measuring tool is not available, you can compare the connector with a standard connector. Figure 13-32 shows an unqualified piece, and Figure 13-33 shows a qualified piece. NOTE

All unqualified pieces must be crimped again.

Figure 13-32 Contact strips of different heights

Figure 13-33 Contact strips of the same height

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

202

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

13 Appendix

Step 2 Hold an RJ45 connector and turn it 45°. Observe the top edges of the metal contact strips. Figure 13-34 shows an unqualified piece. Figure 13-34 Unparallel contact strips of different heights

Step 3 Check whether the contact strips are clean. If they are not clean and the dirt cannot be removed, replace it with a new RJ45 connector. Figure 13-35 shows an unqualified piece. Figure 13-35 Dirt on a contract strip

Step 4 Check whether the contact strips and the plastic separators are well aligned and intact. If a separator is skewed and cannot be fixed, replace it with a new RJ45 connector. Figure 13-36 shows an unqualified piece. Figure 13-36 Skewed plastic separators

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

203

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

13 Appendix

Step 5 Hold the connector with the side facing towards you, and check whether you can see the cross-sections of the wires. Ensure that the ends of the wires are in good contact with the edge of the RJ45, and that the contact strip blade extends beyond the ends of the wires and is crimped with the wires. If not, replace the connector. Figure 13-37 shows an unqualified piece. Figure 13-37 Wires not in good contact with the edge of the RJ45

----End

Testing the Connection of Assembled Cables Context Huawei provides two types of Ethernet cables: straight-through cables and crossover cables. l

Straight-through cables are connected in a one-to-one manner. They are used to connect terminals such as a computer or switch to network devices. Table 13-12 lists the connections of core wires in a straight-through cable. Table 13-12 Connections of core wires in a straight-through cable

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

RJ45 Connector 1

RJ45 Connector 2

Core Wire Color

Twisted or Not

2

2

Orange

Twisted

1

1

Orange-White

6

6

Green

3

3

Green-White

4

4

Blue

5

5

Blue-White

8

8

Brown

7

7

Brown-White

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Twisted

Twisted

Twisted

204

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

l

13 Appendix

Crossover cables are connected in a crossover manner. They are used to connect terminals such as two computers or switches. Table 13-13 lists the connections of core wires in a crossover cable. Table 13-13 Connections of core wires in a straight crossover cable RJ45 Connector 1

RJ45 Connector 2

Core Wire Color

Twisted or Not

6

2

Orange

Twisted

3

1

Orange-White

2

6

Green

1

3

Green-White

4

4

Blue

5

5

Blue-White

8

8

Brown

7

7

Brown-White

Twisted

Twisted

Twisted

Figure 13-38 shows the pins of an RJ45 connector. Figure 13-38 Pins of an RJ45 connector

Pin8 Pin1

Procedure Step 1 Feed both connectors of the cable into the ports of the cable tester. Step 2 After the connectors are properly inserted, turn on the tester. If the indicators from 1 to G turn on simultaneously, you can infer that the pins work normally and the wires are correctly connected. NOTE

Turn the switch to the S position to slow down lighting of the indicators so that you can see the indicators more clearly, as shown in Figure 13-39.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

205

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

13 Appendix

Figure 13-39 Testing the conduction and connections of wires

Step 3 Gently shake the connector and repeat Step 2 to check whether the metal contact strips are in good contact with the core wires and Ethernet ports, as shown in Figure 13-40. Figure 13-40 Checking the reliability

The procedure for testing a crossover cable is the same as that for testing a straight-through cable except for the sequence in which the indicators turn on, which depends on the wire connections of a crossover cable. The Ethernet cable is qualified if the indicators turn on in the following sequence: At the master (left) section of the tester, the indicators turn on in the sequence of 1-8-G. At the slave (right) section of the tester, the indicators turn on in the sequence of 3-6-1-4-5-2-7-8-G. If the indicators do not come on in this sequence, the Ethernet cable is unqualified. Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

206

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

13 Appendix

NOTE

If a tester is not available, you can use a multimeter to perform a simple test, as shown in Figure 13-41.

Figure 13-41 Testing the connection of an Ethernet cable

----End

13.2.4 Installing Cable Accessories Precautions for Installing Cable Accessories Tools NOTE

The illustrations in this document may differ from actual situations, but the installation methods are the same. For example, in this document, the adapters of cable connectors have separate interfaces. In the actual situation, the adapters may have interfaces fixed on equipment.

Use dedicated tools provided or specified by Huawei and follow the installation procedure described here.

Bending Radius Unless otherwise specified, bending radius (R) of cables or fibers must meet the requirements listed in Table 13-14.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

207

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

13 Appendix

Table 13-14 Bending radius of cables or fibers Cable or Fiber

Bending Radius (R)

Ordinary cable

In normal cases, R ≥ 2d. When the cable is connected with a connector, R ≥ 5d.

Fiber

R ≥ 40 mm (1.57 in.); Bending angle > 90°

NOTE

The letter d indicates the diameter of a cable or fiber.

Precautions for Installation l

Hold terminals of cables instead of pulling the cables themselves when installing or removing cable components.

l

Do not insert a connector forcibly when the connector is blocked. Use a dedicated tool to pull out the connector. Install the connector again after you check that the pins are inserted properly.

l

Before tightening screws on cable connectors, ensure that the connectors are properly connected to their adapters. Tighten the screw with appropriate force using a flat-head or Phillips screwdriver instead of bare hands or an electric screwdriver. If the screw cannot be screwed into the tapped hole, determine the reason and try again. Do not apply too much force, or the screw or adapter may be damaged.

l

When removing densely aligned cables or fiber connectors, use dedicated pliers such as cable-pulling pliers and fiber-pulling pliers.

l

Do not twist, bend, stretch, or extrude fibers during installation.

l

Cover the idle fiber connectors with dust caps. Remove the dust caps before using the fiber connectors.

Requirements for Cable Routing l

To protect cables, remove the burrs in the cable through-holes or install protective rings in the holes.

l

To ease the connection and to avoid stress, keep cable joints slack. After connecting multiple cables to a connector that has multiple interfaces, keep the cables slack to avoid generating stress.

l

Bind or clean cables gently because cable distortion affects signal quality.

l

Keep cables away from moveable components such as doors.

l

Sharp objects must not touch cable wiring to prevent damage to cables.

l

To protect power cables, route power cables of the active and standby power modules separately.

Installing Power Adapters Installing the OT Terminal Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

208

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

13 Appendix

Procedure l

Install an OT terminal. a.

Align the hole of the OT terminal (conductor upward) with a connecting hole, as shown in Figure 13-42. Figure 13-42 Aligning the OT terminal with a connecting hole

NOTE

When you install an OT terminal, the crimping sleeve is installed as shown in Figure 13-43, where A is correct and B is incorrect.

Figure 13-43 Installing an OT terminal, showing the orientation of crimping sleeve

b.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Place the spring washer and flat washer in turn, mount a matching screw, and fasten it clockwise, as shown in Figure 13-44.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

209

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

13 Appendix

Figure 13-44 Installing two terminals back to back

NOTICE Ensure that the OT terminal is not in contact with other terminals or metal components. c.

Move the cable slightly and ensure that it is securely connected, as shown in Figure 13-45. Figure 13-45 Installed OT terminal

l

Install two OT terminals on a post. Before you install two OT terminals on a post, ensure that the two terminals can be installed on the post and that the electrical connecting pieces have a large contact area. Two OT terminals can be installed using any of these methods:

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

–

Bend the upper OT terminal at a 45- or 90-degree angle, as shown in Figure 13-46.

–

Cross the two terminals, as shown in Figure 13-47.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

210

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

13 Appendix

Figure 13-46 Bending the upper OT terminal at a 45- or 90-degree angle

Figure 13-47 Crossing two terminals

NOTICE If the two terminals are different sizes, place the smaller one above the bigger one. A maximum of two terminals can be installed on a post. l

To remove an OT terminal, loosen the screw counterclockwise.

----End

Installing the Cord End Terminal

Procedure Step 1 Hold a cord end terminal upright and place it on a terminal jack, as shown in Figure 13-48. To ensure bump contact and dense connection, place the plain side of the terminal outwards. Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

211

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

13 Appendix

Figure 13-48 Placing a terminal on a terminal jack vertically

Step 2 Insert the terminal into the jack vertically, and turn the screw clockwise to fasten the terminal, as shown in Figure 13-49. Figure 13-49 Feeding the terminal into the jack

NOTICE l Ensure that the exposed section of the terminal is less than 2 mm (0.079 in.) in length. l Do not press the insulation of the terminal. l Insert only one terminal into one jack. Step 3 Move the cable slightly and ensure that it is securely connected. Step 4 Before you remove a cord end terminal, loosen the screw counterclockwise. ----End

Installing Ethernet Adapters Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

212

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

13 Appendix

Installing a Shielded Ethernet Connector

Procedure Step 1 Hold the male and female connectors, with the male connector facing the female connector, as shown in Figure 13-50. Figure 13-50 Holding the male and female shielded connectors

Step 2 Insert the male connector into the female connector, as shown in Figure 13-51. Figure 13-51 Feeding the male shielded connector into the female shielded connector

Step 3 When you hear a click, the cable connector is completely inserted in the port. (The clip on the cable connector pops up to fix the connector in the port.) Pull the connector slightly and ensure that it is securely connected, as shown in Figure 13-52.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

213

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

13 Appendix

Figure 13-52 Installed shielded Ethernet connector

Step 4 To remove an Ethernet connector, press the locking key and pull out the connector, as shown in Figure 13-53. Figure 13-53 Removing a shielded Ethernet connector

----End

Installing an Unshielded Ethernet Connector

Procedure Step 1 Hold the male and female connectors, with the male connector facing the female connector, as shown in Figure 13-54.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

214

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

13 Appendix

Figure 13-54 Holding the male and female unshielded connectors

Step 2 Feed the male connector into the female connector, as shown in Figure 13-55. Figure 13-55 Feeding the male connector into the female unshielded connector

Step 3 A crisp click indicates that the connector is locked by the locking key. Pull the connector slightly and ensure that it is securely connected. Figure 13-56 shows an installed Ethernet connector. Figure 13-56 Installed unshielded Ethernet connector

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

215

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

13 Appendix

Step 4 To remove an Ethernet connector, press the locking key and pull out the connector, as shown in Figure 13-57. Figure 13-57 Removing an unshielded Ethernet connector

----End

Installing Fiber Connectors Context

NOTICE l After you remove the dustproof cap, ensure that the fiber pins are clean and install them as soon as possible. l When you disassemble fiber connectors, you must use a dedicated tool if the connectors are densely installed.

Cleaning Fiber Connectors

Procedure Step 1 Clean the pins of a fiber connector by using lint-free cotton and alcohol. Step 2 Clean the pins again by using dust-free cotton. If necessary, clean the pins by using an air gun. Ensure that the pins are free from any fiber or debris. ----End

Installing an FC Fiber Connector Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

216

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

13 Appendix

Procedure Step 1 Remove the dustproof cap of the FC connector and store it for future use. Step 2 Align the core pin of the male connector with that of the female connector, as shown in Figure 13-58. Figure 13-58 Aligning the male connector with the female connector

Step 3 Align the male connector with the female connector and gently push the male connector until it is completely seated in the female connector, as shown in Figure 13-59. Figure 13-59 Feeding the male connector into the female connector

Step 4 Fasten the locking nut clockwise and ensure that the connector is securely installed, as shown in Figure 13-60.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

217

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

13 Appendix

Figure 13-60 Fastening the locking nut

Step 5 To disassemble an FC fiber connector, loosen the locking nut counterclockwise, and gently pull the male connector, as shown in Figure 13-61. Figure 13-61 Disassembling an FC fiber connector

----End

Installing an LC Fiber Connector

Procedure Step 1 Remove the dustproof cap of the LC fiber connector and store it for future use. Step 2 Align the core pin of the male connector with that of the female connector, as shown in Figure 13-62. Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

218

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

13 Appendix

Figure 13-62 Aligning the male connector with the female connector

Step 3 Align the male connector with the fiber adapter and gently push the male connector until it is completely seated in the fiber connector, as shown in Figure 13-63. Figure 13-63 Feeding the male connector into the female connector

Step 4 A clicking sound indicates that the male connector is locked, as shown in Figure 13-64. Figure 13-64 Installed LC connector

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

219

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

13 Appendix

Step 5 To disassemble an LC fiber connector, press the locking nut to release the locking clips from the bore, and gently pull the male connector, as shown in Figure 13-65. Figure 13-65 Disassembling an LC fiber connector

----End

Installing the SC Fiber Connector

Procedure Step 1 Remove the dustproof cap of the SC fiber connector and store it for future use. Step 2 Align the core pin of the male connector with that of the female connector, as shown in Figure 13-66. Figure 13-66 Aligning the male connector with the female connector

Step 3 Feed the fiber connector into the female connector, with your fingers holding the shell of the fiber connector (not the pigtail). When you hear a click, the fiber connector is secured by the clips (internal parts, not illustrated in the figure). Pull the fiber connector gently. If the connector does not loosen, the installation is complete. See Figure 13-67. Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

220

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

13 Appendix

Figure 13-67 Installed SC fiber connector

Step 4 To disassemble an SC fiber connector, hold the shell of the connector (do not hold the fiber) and gently pull the connector in the direction vertical to the adapter. Unlock the male connector, and then separate it from the shell, as shown in Figure 13-68. Figure 13-68 Disassembling an SC fiber connector

----End

Installing an MPO Connector

Procedure Step 1 Remove the dustproof cap of the MPO fiber connector and store it for future use. Step 2 Align the core pin of the male connector with that of the female connector, as shown in Figure 13-69.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

221

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

13 Appendix

Figure 13-69 Aligning the male connector with the female connector

Step 3 Hold the shell labeled "PUSH" and feed the male connector into the female connector until you hear a clicking sound. The male and female connectors are securely installed, as shown in Figure 13-70. Figure 13-70 Installed MPO fiber connector

Step 4 To disassemble an MPO fiber connector, hold the shell labeled "PULL" and remove the male connector, as shown in Figure 13-71.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

222

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

13 Appendix

Figure 13-71 Disassembling an MPO fiber connector

----End

13.2.5 Replacing the Mold of the Crimping Tool Procedure Step 1 Hold the handles of a pair of COAX crimping tools. Loosen the two fastening screws counterclockwise, as shown in Figure 13-72. Figure 13-72 Loosening two fastening screws

Step 2 Hold the handles of the COAX crimping tools to open the self-locking mechanism. The jaw of the COAX crimping tools opens automatically, as shown in Figure 13-73.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

223

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

13 Appendix

Figure 13-73 Pliers jaw opening automatically

Step 3 Remove the mold from the COAX crimping tools, as shown in Figure 13-74. Figure 13-74 Removing the mold from the COAX crimping tools

Step 4 Place the mold to be installed into the jaw of the COAX crimping tools and align the screw holes, as shown in Figure 13-75.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

224

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

13 Appendix

Figure 13-75 Installing a new mold in the COAX crimping tool

NOTICE Keep the short side of the mold inwards and the long side outwards, with the teeth of the mold aligning from the larger size to the smaller size. Step 5 Hold the handles of the COAX crimping tools tightly to match the mold and the jaw completely. Align the screw holes, as shown in Figure 13-76. Figure 13-76 Aligning the screw holes

Step 6 Hold the handles of the COAX crimping tools with one hand. Tighten the two fastening screws clockwise. Figure 13-77 and Figure 13-78shows the mold installed in the COAX crimping tool.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

225

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

13 Appendix

Figure 13-77 Mold installed in the COAX crimping tool

Figure 13-78 An installed mold

----End

13.3 Appendix C Environmental Requirements for Device Operation 13.3.1 Environmental Requirements for an Equipment Room Requirements for Selecting a Site for an Equipment Room When designing a project, consider the communication network planning and technical requirements of the equipment. Also consider hydrographic, geological, seismic, power supply, and transportation factors. Construction, structure, heating and ventilation, power supply, lighting and fire-proof construction of the equipment room should be designed by specialized construction designers to suit the environmental requirements of devices. The equipment room should also follow local regulations concerning the industrial construction, environmental protection, fire safety, Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

226

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

13 Appendix

and civil air defense. Construction must conform to government standards, regulations, and other requirements. The equipment room should be located in a place free from high temperature, dust, toxic gases, explosive materials, or unstable voltage. Keep the equipment room away from significant vibrations or loud noises, as well as power transformer stations. The specific requirements for selecting a site for an equipment room are as follows: l

The room should be located at a distance of at least 5 km (3.11 mi.) from heavy pollution sources such as smelting and coal mines. It should be located at a distance of at least 3.7 km (2.30 mi.) from moderate pollution sources such as chemical, rubber, and galvanization factories. It should be located at a distance of at least 2 km (1.24 mi.) from light pollution sources such as packinghouses and tanyards. If these pollution sources cannot be avoided, ensure that the equipment room is upwind of the pollution sources. In addition, use a high-quality equipment room or protection products.

l

The room should be located away from livestock farms, or be upwind of the livestock farms. Do not use an old livestock room or fertilizer warehouse as the equipment room.

l

The equipment room must be far away from residential areas. An equipment room that is not far away from residential areas must comply with equipment room construction standards to avoid noise pollution.

l

The room should be located far away from industrial and heating boilers.

l

The room should be at least 3.7 km (2.30 mi.) away from the seaside or salt lake. Otherwise, the equipment room should be airtight with cooling facilities. In addition, alkalized soil cannot be used as the construction material. Otherwise, equipment suitable for wet conditions must be used.

l

The doors and windows of the equipment room must be kept closed to maintain an airtight room.

l

Using steel doors to ensure sound insulation is recommended.

l

No cracks or openings are allowed on the walls or floors. The outlet holes on the walls or windows must be sealed. Walls must be constructed such that they are smooth, wearresistant, dustproof, flame retardant, sound insulated, heat absorptive, and have electromagnetic shielding.

l

The air vent of the room should be far from the exhaust of city waste pipes, big cesspools and sewage treatment tanks. The room should be in the positive pressure state to prevent corrosive gases from entering the equipment room and corroding components and circuit boards.

l

It is recommended that the room be on or above the second floor. If this requirement cannot be met, the ground for equipment installation in the room should be at least 600 mm (23.62 in,) above the maximum flood level.

l

The equipment room should be strong enough to resist winds and downpours.

l

The room should be located away from dusty roads or sand. If this is unavoidable, the doors and windows of the equipment room must not face pollution sources.

l

Do not place air conditioning vents near the equipment so that they blow directly on the equipment because condensation may be blown into the equipment.

l

Do not use decorative materials that contain sulfur in the equipment room.

Equipment Room Layout An equipment room usually contains mobile switching equipment, telecommunications equipment, power supply equipment, and other auxiliary equipment. To ensure easy Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

227

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

13 Appendix

maintenance and management, place the equipment in different rooms. Figure 13-79 shows the layout of the equipment room. Figure 13-79 Layout of the equipment room

Transmission room

Control room

Generator room

Main communication equipment room

Power distribution room

Battery room

Substation room Communication cable and optical cable Power cable

The general layout principles of the equipment room are as follows: l

It should meet requirements for laying out and maintaining communication cables and power cables.

l

It should reduce the cabling distance, which facilitates cable maintenance, reduces potential communication faults, and maximizes efficiency.

Construction Requirements for the Equipment Room Table 13-15 describes the construction requirements for the equipment room. Table 13-15 Construction requirements for the equipment room

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Item

Requirements

Area

The smallest area of the equipment room can accommodate the equipment with the largest capacity.

Net height

The minimum height of the equipment room should not be less than 3 m (9.84 ft). The minimum height of the equipment room is the net height below overhead beams or ventilation pipes.

Floor

The floor in the equipment room should be semi-conductive and dustproof. A raised floor with an ESD covering is recommended. Cover the raised floor tightly and solidly. The horizontal tolerance of each square meter should be less than 2 mm (0.08 in.). If raised floors are unavailable, use a static-electricity-conductive floor material, with a volume resistivity of 1.0 x 107 ohms to 1.0 x 1010 ohms. Ground this floor material or raised floor. You can connect them to ground using a one megohm current-limiting resistor and connection line. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

228

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

13 Appendix

Item

Requirements

Load-bearing capacity

The floor must bear loads larger than 150 kg/m2 (0.21 bf/in.2).

Door and windows

The door of the equipment room should be 2 m (6.56 ft) high and 1 m (3.28 ft) wide. One door is enough. Seal the doors and windows with dustproof plastic tape. Use double-pane glass in the windows and seal them tightly.

Wall surface treatment

Paste wallpaper on the wall or apply flat paint. Do not use pulverized paint.

Cable trays

Use cable trays to arrange cables. The inner faces of the cable trays must be smooth. The reserved length and width of the cable trays, and the number, position and dimensions of the holes must comply with the requirements of device arrangement.

Water pipe

Do not pass service pipes, drainpipes, and storm sewers through the equipment room. Do not place a fire hydrant in the equipment room, but place it in the corridor or near the staircase.

Internal partition wall

Separate the area where the equipment is installed from the equipment room door. The partition wall can block some outside dust.

Installation position of the air conditioner

Install air conditioner vents so that the air does not blow directly on equipment.

Other requirements

Avoid the proliferation of mildew, and keep out rodents (like mice).

Figure 13-80 Internal partition wall inside the equipment room

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

229

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

13 Appendix

Equipment Room Environment Dust on devices may cause electrostatic discharge and result in poor contact for connectors or metal connection points. This problem can shorten the life span of devices and cause faults. The equipment room must be free from explosive, conductive, magnetically-permeable, and corrosive dust. Table 13-16 lists the requirement for dust concentration in the equipment room. Table 13-16 Requirements for dust particles in the equipment room Mechanical active material

Unit

Concentration

Dust particle

Particle /m3

≤ 3x 104 (no visible dust accumulated on a workbench in three days)

Suspending dust

mg/m3

≤0.2

Precipitable dust

mg/m2·h

≤1.5

Description l Dust particle diameter ≥ 5 µm l Suspending dust diameter ≤ 75 µm l 75 µm ≤ precipitable dust diameter ≤ 150 µm

Take the following measures to meet the requirements: l

Use dustproof materials for ground, wall, and ceiling construction.

l

Use screens on the door and windows facing outside. The outer windows should be dustproof.

l

Clean the equipment room regularly and clean the air filter monthly.

l

Wear shoe covers and ESD clothing before entering the equipment room.

Requirements for Corrosive Gases The room should be free from dusts and corrosive gases, such as SO2, H2S, and NH3. Table 13-17 lists the requirements for the corrosive gas concentration. Table 13-17 Requirements for corrosive gas concentration

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Chemical active material

Unit

Concentration

SO2

mg/m3

≤0.20

H2S

mg/m3

≤0.006

NH3

mg/m3

≤0.05

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

230

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

13 Appendix

Chemical active material

Unit

Concentration

Cl2

mg/m3

≤0.01

Take the following measures to meet the requirements: l

Avoid constructing the room near a place where the corrosive gas concentration is high, such as a chemical plant.

l

Ensure the air intake vent of the room is in the prevailing upwind direction from any pollution source.

l

Place batteries in different rooms.

l

A professional service should monitor the corrosive gas conditions regularly.

Requirements for ESD Prevention The absolute value of electrostatic voltage must be less than 1000 V. Take the following measures to meet this requirement: l

Train operators about ESD prevention.

l

Keep the correct humidity level in the equipment room to reduce the impact of static electricity.

l

Lay out an ESD floor in equipment rooms.

l

Wear ESD shoes and clothing before entering equipment room.

l

Use ESD tools, such as wrist straps, tweezers, and pullers.

l

Ground all conductive materials in the room, including computer terminals. Use ESD worktables.

l

Keep non-ESD materials (such as common bags, foam, and rubber) at least 30 cm (11.81 in.) away from boards and ESD-sensitive components.

Electromagnetism Requirements for the Equipment Room All interference sources, inside or outside the equipment room, can cause equipment problems with capacitive coupling, inductive coupling, electromagnetic wave radiation, and common impedance (including grounding system) coupling. Prevent the interference using these approaches: l

Take effective measures against electrical interference from the power supply system.

l

Do not use the working ground of the equipment as the same ground for surge protection. Separate them as far as possible.

l

Keep the equipment far away from high-power radio transmitters, radar units, and highfrequency and high-current equipment.

l

Use electromagnetic shielding if necessary.

Requirements for Lightning Proof Grounding Table 13-18 lists the requirements for lightning proof grounding. Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

231

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

13 Appendix

Table 13-18 Requirements for lightning proof grounding Item

Requirements

Capital construction

l Use reinforced concrete to construct the equipment room. l Install a lightning proof device like a lightning rod outside the room. l The lightning proof ground shares the same grounding body with the protective ground of the room.

Power cables leading in the equipment room need to be equipped with a surge protector

l After the low-voltage power cables are led into the room, install the surge protector for the power cables in the AC voltage stabilizer and the AC power distribution panel (box). Correctly ground the surge protector nearby. l For an equipment room in urban area, install a power supply surge protector with the nominal discharge current of no less than 20 kA. For an equipment room that is built in a suburb and subject to lightning strikes, install a power supply surge protector with the nominal discharge current of more than 60 kA. For an equipment room that is built in a mountain area and subject to frequent lightning strikes, or in a separate high-rise building in a city, install a power supply surge protector with the nominal discharge current of more than 100 kA. l The ground cable of the surge protector should be no longer than 1 m (3.28 ft). l Connect the DC working ground (positive pole of the -48 V DC power supply or the negative pole of the 24 V DC power supply) with the indoor collective ground cable nearby. The total ground cable should meet the maximum load of the equipment.

Grounding for DC power distribution

l The power equipment must have a DC working ground cable, which can connect the power equipment to the collective ground cable of the telecommunication site (or the protective ground bar of the equipment room). l Properly ground the devices and auxiliary devices in the room such as mobile base station, transmission, switching equipment, power supply equipment, and cable distribution frame. Connect all PGND cables to the collective protective ground bar. Connect all PGND cables in one equipment room to one protective ground bar.

Equipotential connection

l Apply joint grounding to the working ground and protective ground of devices, which means the two share one grounding network. l The cable tray, rack or shell, metal ventilation pipe, metal door or window of the equipment should be grounded for protection. General requirements for grounding

l Do not connect the neutral line of the AC power cable with the protective ground of any telecom equipment in the equipment room. l Do not install a fuse or switch on the ground cable. l All ground cables should be as short as possible, and arranged in a straight line.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

232

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

Item

Requirements

Grounding resistance

l The grounding resistance must be lower than 1 ohm.

13 Appendix

l The upper end of the grounding body should be at least 0.7 m (2.30 ft) over the ground. In cold areas, bury the grounding body below the frozen ground. l Measure the grounding resistance periodically to ensure effective grounding. l Do not arrange the signal cables overhead in the equipment room. All signal cables must be led into the site underground.

Routing of signal cable

l Use the cables with a metal jacket or place them into a metal pipe if they come out/in the equipment room. l Ground the idle lines inside the cable in the equipment room. l Signal cables should be deployed on internal walls. Do not deploy outdoor aerial cables. l Keep signal cables away from power cables and surge protection devices. l Use a ground ring or ground bar for the collective ground cable.

Collective ground cable

l Do not use aluminum cables as ground cables. Adopt measures to prevent electrification corrosion when connecting different metal parts together. l Use a copper busbar as the collective ground cable with a crosssectional area of no less than 120 mm2 (0.19 in.2), or use the galvanized flat steel of the same resistance. Insulate the collective ground cable from the reinforcing steel bars of the building.

Grounding leadin

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

The grounding lead-in should be a maximum of 30 m (98.42 ft) long. Use the galvanized flat steel with cross-sectional area of 40 mm x 4 mm (1.58 in. x 0.158 in.) or 50 mm x 5 mm (1.97 in. x 0.197 in.).

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

233

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

13 Appendix

Item

Requirements

Grounding of the cabinet

l All the devices including the surge protection device in the cabinet must be connected in an equipotential manner. The ground cables can be aggregated to the ground bar or surge protector socket first, and then the ground bar or surge protector socket can be connected to the ground. l The resistance between the device ground terminals and ground bar cannot exceed 0.1 ohm. l The cabinet can be grounded using the protecting earthing (PE) wire of the electrical network in the building, zinc-coated angle steel, or the main steel bar of the building. l If the cabinet is grounded using the PE wire of the electrical network, use a multimeter to test the grounding status. If the voltage between the PE wire and neutral wire is lower than 5 V and the voltage between the PE wire and live wire is about 220 V, the PE wire is grounded well. If the tested AC voltages are not within the ranges, the cabinet must be grounded in other ways. l The yellow-green ground cable contains multiple copper wires. The cross-sectional area of the ground cable must be no less than 6 mm2 (0.0093 in.2) and the length cannot exceed 3 m (9.84 ft.). l Ground cables cannot be twisted with signal cables. l Antirust and anticorrosion measures must be taken on the ground terminals. l The fiber reinforcing rib can be directly connected to the ground bar of the cabinet. Before wrapping the reinforcing rib with insulation tape, cut a 0.5 m (1.64 ft.) segment from the reinforcing rib. Wrap the reinforcing rib with at least five layers of insulation tape. Keep the reinforcing rib at least 5 cm (1.969 in.) from the cabinet surface.

13.3.2 Requirements for Power Supply Requirements for AC Power Supply An AC power supply system consists of power mains, uninterruptible power supplies (UPSs), and self-supplied electric generators. In addition to meeting the requirements of the server load, the AC power supply must have a simple connection line, safe operation, flexible scheduling, and easy maintenance. The low-voltage power supply should be 3-phase, 5-wire mode or monophase 3-wire mode. This AC power supply should be 110 V/220 V, with a frequency of 50 Hz. The UPS should supply the same power and operate at the same phase as the power mains. The switching time between the UPS and mains should be less than 10 ms; otherwise, the networking devices will reboot or reset. For power distribution capacity in the equipment room, both the working current and fault current of the devices should be considered. Ensure that independent AC power supplies Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

234

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

13 Appendix

protect independent devices. Configure the current-carrying capacity of the protection switch of the equipment room for more than that of the devices. Table 13-19 lists the voltage range of the AC power supply for the devices. Table 13-19 Voltage range of AC power supply Item

Requirements

AC power capacity to support the devices

-10% to +5% of the rated voltage

AC power capacity to support the power modules and important buildings

-15% to +10% of the rated voltage

Frequency of alternating current

-4% to +4% of the rated value

Voltage wave shape sine distortion

Within 5% of the rated voltage

The automated electric generator must have a standard interface that supports telecommunication protocols, remote telecommunication, monitoring, and control. AC power cables should meet the following specifications: l

AC neutral should have a conductor with the same cross section as the phase line.

l

AC cables should have non-flammable insulation. The layout of AC cables should comply with local regulations. Low-voltage power distribution rooms should comply with local regulations.

Recommendations for AC Power Supply The following are recommendations for the AC power supply. l

If the voltage of the power mains that supply power directly to devices exceeds the rated voltage by -10% to 5%, or exceeds the voltage range that devices can support, a voltage regulating device or voltage stabilizing device is required.

l

If the mains do not supply power for the device directly, or if the mains voltage exceeds the rated voltage by -15% to 10% or exceeds the input voltage range of the DC power supply, a voltage regulating device or voltage stabilizing device is required.

l

A UPS or inverter power supply system is required to provide uninterrupted AC power to support the telecommunication load.

l

If abnormalities occur on the mains, telecommunication servers should be equipped with a self-supplied electric generator to support the key telecommunication load. The capacity should be not less than 150% to 200% of the total uninterruptible power supply.

l

Storage batteries are usually installed in a parallel connection of two groups. UPS storage batteries are generally installed in one group. The redundancy required for the UPS can rely on concatenation or parallel connection. When an inverter or a UPS is used, the active inverter is determined by the maximum power and a backup inverter is required.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

235

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

13 Appendix

Requirements for DC Power Supply The equipment room should receive stable and reliable DC power. Deploy the power equipment near the telecommunications equipment to make the DC feeder as short as possible. To reduce power consumption and installation cost, the loop voltage drop from the battery port to the equipment port should be less than 3.2 V. l

A large-scale enterprise can deploy an independent power supply system on each floor to supply power to the telecommunications equipment room on the respective floor.

l

A medium-scale enterprise can use a power room and a battery room for centralized power supply or use distributed power supply systems.

l

A small-scale enterprise can deploy an integrated power supply system in its equipment room but must take measures to prevent corrosive gases released from batteries from eroding circuit boards of telecommunications equipment.

Table 13-20 lists the specifications for the DC power supply. Table 13-20 Specifications for the DC power supply Item

Requirements

DC power capacity to support the surge current

Greater than 1.5 times the rated current

Regulated voltage precision

If the AC input voltage is in the range of 85% to 110% of the rated value, and the load current is in the range of 5% to 100% of the rated value, the output voltage of the rectifier ranges from -46.0 V to -56.4 V, with the regulated voltage precision less than or equal to 1%.

Overshoot amplitude of switch on/off

Integral value of the DC output voltage ±5%

Peak noise voltage

≤200 mV

Dynamic response

The recovery time is less than 200 ms. The overshoot is in the range of the integral value of the DC output voltage ±5%.

Recommendations for DC Power Supply The following are recommendations for the DC power supply. l

Use distributed power supply mode. Use multiple DC power supply systems and put power equipment in multiple locations.

l

Adopt a standard DC power supply system, and set the output voltage to the communications equipment within the required range.

l

Improve reliability of the AC power supply system to reduce the necessary capacity of storage batteries. For small offices, increase the capacity of storage batteries if it is difficult to enhance reliability of the AC power supply system.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

236

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

13 Appendix

l

The total capacity of the high-frequency switching rectifier must satisfy the power of the communication loading and battery charging. If there are 10 or fewer active rectifier modules, configure one backup module. If there are more than 10 active modules, configure one backup module for every 10 active modules.

l

Install storage batteries in two or more groups. The capacity is determined by the duration for which the storage batteries must supply power. For most offices, the batteries should be able to supply power for at least one hour.

13.4 Appendix D Equipment Grounding Specifications 13.4.1 General Grounding Specifications Table 13-21 shows the general grounding specifications. Table 13-21 General grounding specifications No.

Description

1

The working ground and protective ground, including the shielded ground and the lightning-proof ground of the cable distribution frame should share the same grounding conductor.

2

The cable trays, shells, metal ventilation pipes, metal doors and windows in the equipment room should be grounded for protection.

3

The metal parts of the equipment which are electrically floating in normal conditions should be grounded for protection.

4

The ground cable must be connected securely to the protective ground bar of the equipment room.

5

Do not use other equipment as part of the ground cable or electrical connection.

13.4.2 Grounding Specifications for an Equipment Room The grounding resistance of a comprehensive communication building should be less than or equal to one ohm. The grounding resistance of an ordinary communication office should be less than five ohms. The grounding resistance in an area where the earth resistance rate is high should be less than 10 ohms.

13.4.3 Grounding Specifications for Devices Table 13-22 lists the equipment grounding specifications.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

237

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

13 Appendix

Table 13-22 Equipment Grounding Specifications No.

Description

1

All communication devices and auxiliary devices (such as mobile base stations, transmission and switching devices, power supply devices) in the equipment room should be grounded for protection. Connect all protective ground for various devices jointly to a general ground bar, and then to the same protective ground bar in the room together with the protective ground (PGND) of the device.

2

The PGND of the equipment is shorted to the copper ground bar provided by the customer. The short-circuiting cable used should be a yellow-green plastic insulated cable with a copper core and a cross-sectional area greater than 25 sq. mm (0.039 sq. in.).

3

There are grounding terminals and grounding lugs at the lower part of the front door, rear door and side panel of the cabinet, connected to the grounding terminals of the cabinet framework through connection cables with cross-sectional area of no less than 1.6 sq. mm (0.002 sq. in.).

4

Ensure that all metal components of the cabinet conduct well. No insulating coating should be sprayed on the connection part of the metal components.

5

Connect the cabinets in the same row by fastening captive screws and gaskets on the top of the cabinets. Do not spray any coating into a rectangular area measuring 30 mm x 50 mm (1.18 in. x 1.97 in.) around the connection hole for a captive bolt. Measures to prevent rust and corrosion must be taken for this area. Zinc electroplating with iridescent yellow chromate conversion coating should be applied to the gasket and nut to ensure good electrical contact.

6

When combining cabinets of the same type, short-circuiting cables are required to connect the ground busbars (if any) of the cabinets. The cross-sectional area of the short-circuiting cable is 6 sq. mm (0.009 sq. in.) and is no more than 300 mm (11.8 in.) long. Connect the two ends of the short-circuiting cable to the ground busbar terminals of neighboring cabinets and fix them firmly.

13.4.4 Grounding Specifications for Communications Power Supply Table 13-23 shows the grounding specifications for communication power supplies. Table 13-23 Grounding specifications for communication power supplies

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

No.

Description

1

The inlet for the AC power cable at the equipment room should be equipped with a surge protection device (C-level) with a nominal discharge current no less than 20 kA.

2

The protective ground for the power supply and that for communication equipment share the same grounding conductor. If the power supply and the equipment are in the same equipment room, use the same protective ground bar for them if possible. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

238

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

13 Appendix

No.

Description

3

Use a surge protection circuit on the AC power interface.

4

The positive of the -48 V DC power supply or negative pole of the 24 V DC power supply should be grounded at the output of the DC power supply.

5

The working ground and protective ground of the DC power supply equipment should use the same grounding conductor with the protective ground of the switching equipment. If the power supply and equipment are in the same equipment room, use the same protection ground bar for them if possible.

6

Add surge protection on the DC power interface.

13.4.5 Grounding Specifications for Signal Cables Table 13-24 lists the grounding specifications for signal cables. Table 13-24 Grounding specifications for signal cables No.

Description

1

Equip the cable outdoors with a metal jacket, well grounded at both ends, or connect the ends of the metal jacket to the protective ground bar of the equipment room. For cables inside the equipment room, install surge protection devices at the interface to the equipment. The PGND cable for the surge protection devices should be as short as possible.

2

The incoming and outgoing signal cables to and from the office and unused wires inside the cable should be grounded for protection.

3

The Tone & Data Access (TDA) cable must pass through the Main Distribution Frame (MDF) with surge protective device (SPD) when going out of the office. The cable's shield layer should be connected to the protective ground of the MDF. The MDF should use the same grounding conductor as the cabinet.

4

Do not route signal cables overhead.

13.4.6 Specifications for Laying Out Grounding Cables Table 13-25 shows the specifications for the ground cable. Table 13-25 Specifications for laying out ground cables

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

No.

Description

1

The grounding wire should not run parallel to or twist around the signal cable.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

239

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

13 Appendix

No.

Description

2

Bury ground underground or arrange them indoors. Do not route ground cables overhead.

3

Do not connect two cables together to extend the PGND cable, or add any switches or fuses.

4

The PGND cable should be an alternating yellow and green plastic insulated one with a copper core.

5

The neutral line of the AC power cable cannot be connected to the protective ground of transmission and communication equipment in the equipment room.

6

A PGND cable should be as short as possible, with a length of no more than 45 m (147.64 ft).

13.5 Appendix E Engineering Labels for Cables An engineering label serves as an identifier for on-site installation and maintenance after the installation. Labels on the cables facilitate correct and orderly connection of cables, and easy maintenance after installation. Engineering labels are specialized for power cables and signal cables: l

Signal cables include network cables, optical fibers, and user cables.

l

Power cables include the AC power cables and DC power cables. NOTE

Fill in labels according to specified requirements to keep consistency of labels in the equipment room. Make a relevant statement in the self-check report.

13.5.1 Introduction to Labels Label Materials Features: l

Thickness: 0.09 mm (0.004 in.)

l

Color: chalk white

l

Material: polyester (PET)

l

Ambient temperature: -29°C (-20.2°F) to +149°C (300.2°F)

l

Printed by a laser printer and written with a marker

l

Pass UL and CSA authentication

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

240

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

13 Appendix

Type and Structure Label for Signal Cables The label for signal cables is L-shaped with fixed dimensions, as shown in Figure 13-81. Figure 13-81 Label for signal cables

To specify more clearly the position of a cable, use the dividing lines on the label. For example, there is a dividing line between the cabinet number and the chassis number, and another one between the chassis number and the slot number. Each dividing line is light blue (Pantone 656c) and 1.5 mm x 0.6 mm (0.06 in. x 0.02 in.). The cut dotted line helps to fold the label when affixed to the cable, and its size is 1 mm x 2 mm (0.04 in. x 0.08 in.). The word "TO:" (upside down in the figure) at the lower right corner of the label is used to identify the opposite end of the cable on which the label is affixed.

Power Cable Label The label for power cables should be attached to the identification plate on the cable ties that are attached to the cable. The identification plate has an embossed area 0.2 mm x 0.6 mm (0.008 in. x 0.02 in.) around (symmetric on both sides), and the area in the middle is for affixing the label, as shown in Figure 13-82. Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

241

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

13 Appendix

Figure 13-82 Power cable label

Label Printing The contents can be printed or written on the labels. Printing is recommended for the sake of high efficiency and eye-pleasant layout.

Template for Printing You can obtain a template from the Huawei local office to print labels. The template is made in Microsoft Word. Follow these instructions to use the template: l

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

You can modify the contents of the template. Do not change settings of centered characters, direction, and fonts. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

242

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

l

13 Appendix

If many characters need to be filled in, decrease the font size, but make sure that the printouts are clear and legible.

Merging Cells in the Template To merge two or more cells, do as follows: 1.

Select Edit/Select All.

2.

Select Format/Borders and Shading/Borders. Select Box tab and click OK.

3.

Drag the mouse to select cells to be merged and select the Table/Merge Cells.

Requirements on the Printer To print labels, use a laser jet printer of any model. Before printing labels, set up the page and try printing. 1.

Try printing on ordinary paper with both sides blank. Place the blank paper over the whole page of the label paper, and check whether the page setup conforms to the label layout.

2.

Make sure the printer properties, such as "paper size" and "direction", have been set correctly. –

If the printout conforms to the sheet of labels, print the labels on the label paper.

–

If the printout does not conform, adjust the page setup and try printing again until the correct printout is produced.

The method for adjusting the page setup is as follows. 1.

Select File/Page Setup.

2.

Select Layout and set Header and Footer as 0.

3.

Select the Margins tab page. Select Left for Gutter Position and adjust the values of Top, Bottom, Left, and Right. NOTE

If the warning prompt as shown in Figure 13-83 appears before printing, click Ignore to continue the printing.

Figure 13-83 Warning prompt before printing

After the page setup has been made correctly, save it for future use. This page setup is only necessary the first time you use the template to print the labels.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

243

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

13 Appendix

Requirements for Feeding the Printer The label paper consists of two layers and has undergone multiple processing procedures such as printing and cutting. No matter what model of printer you use, feed in the labels one page at a time. To avoid jamming the labels, never use the auto-feed mode. Feed in the label paper in the correct direction to ensure that the text is printed in a correct position.

Requirements for the Printed Label Make sure that the printed labels satisfy the following requirements: l

All the printouts must be on the label, and nothing should be printed on the backing layer of the label page.

l

Contents in the cells should be aligned in the center. In a single-line printout, the dividing lines and the word "TO:" should not be covered by printed characters.

l

When the cells are merged and the printouts are made in multiple lines, avoid covering the word "TO:" when printing the text. Use the space bar to move the text to the next line.

Writing Labels Writing Tools To make sure the printouts are clear and legible, use black markers instead of ball-point pens to write the labels. If no marker is available, black ball-point pens are allowed, although not recommended. Compared with ball-point pens, water-proof markers are better. When writing with a ballpoint pen, do not leave the oil on the label, which may contaminate the label and blur the words. NOTE

The delivered marker has two nibs. Use the smaller nib to write the labels.

Font For the sake of legibility, use standard block letters and numbers as shown in Table 13-26 (Times New Roman). Table 13-26 Standard typeface for handwriting 0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

Q

R

S

T

U

V

W

X

Y

Z

Determine the size of characters based on the number of letters or digits and ensure that the characters are distinct and tidy. Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

244

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

13 Appendix

Placement of text on a label is shown in Figure 13-84. Figure 13-84 Placement of text on a label

Attaching Labels After printing or writing the label, remove the label from the page and attach it to the signal cable, or the identification plate of the power cable. The methods for attaching labels are described in the following sections.

Label for Signal Cables l

Choose the place to attach labels. The label is attached 2 cm (0.79 in.) from the connector on a signal cable. In special cases (for example, to avoid cable bending or affecting other cables), other positions are allowed to attach the labels. The rectangular part with text is attached facing right or downward, as shown in Figure 13-85. The details are as follows: –

The identification card is to the right of the cable in vertical cabling.

–

The identification card should be downward when you lay out the cable horizontally.

Figure 13-85 Text area of the label

l

Procedure for attaching labels Figure 13-86 shows the methods and procedures for attaching labels.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

245

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

13 Appendix

Figure 13-86 Label for signal cables

Power Cable Label Remove the label from the backing page, and attach it to the identification plate on the cable tie. The label should be attached to the rectangular flute on the identification plate, and attached to only one side of the identification plate. The cable ties are bundled at 2 cm (0.79 in.) from the connectors, and other positions are allowed in special circumstances. Cable ties should be bound on both ends of a cable. After the bundling, the finished identification plate should be on top of the cable in horizontal cabling, or on the right side of the cable in vertical cabling, as shown in Figure 13-87. The details are as follows: l

The identification card is to the right of the cable in vertical cabling.

l

The identification card is on the top of the cable in horizontal cabling. Make sure that the label is facing out.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

246

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

13 Appendix

Figure 13-87 Binding the label for the power cable Cable TO: B03

TO: B03

-48V2

-48V2

Cable

The identification card is on the top of the cable in horizontal cabling.

The identification card is to the right of the cable in vertical cabling.

Contents of Engineering Labels Contents of Labels for Power Cables Labels for power cables are affixed on only one side of the identification plates. On the labels, there is information (the part after the word "TO:") about the location of the device on the other end of the cable, like the location of control cabinet, distribution box or power socket.

Contents of Labels for Signal Cables The two sides of the label affixed on the signal cable carry information about the location of the ports connected to both ends of the cable. Figure 13-88 shows the information on both sides of the labels affixed to the signal cables. l

Area 1 contains the location information of the local end of the cable.

l

Area 2 (with the word "TO:") contains the location information of the opposite end of the cable.

l

Area 3 has been folded up inside the label.

Figure 13-88 Printed parts on the label for signal cables

Seen from the cabling end of the equipment, the text part of the label is on the right side of the cable. The side with "TO:" that is facing outside carries the location information of the opposite end; and the other side carries the location information of the local end. Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

247

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

13 Appendix

In other words, the information in Area 1 at one end is the same as the information in Area 2 at the other end of the cable.

Precautions for Using Engineering Labels When using labels, pay attention to the following points: l

When printing, writing, or attaching labels, keep the labels clean.

l

Since the label paper is made of moistureproof material, ink-jet printers and ink pens cannot be used to print and write labels.

l

Labels should be attached neatly. New-type labels are L-shaped. If they are pasted at incorrect locations or in the incorrect direction, the appearance of the device is affected.

l

Power cable ties should be attached in the same positions on power cables, with identification plates on the same side.

l

The positions of "up", "down", "left" or "right" are all based on the viewpoint of the engineering person who is working on the label.

13.5.2 Engineering Labels for Optical Fibers These labels are affixed to the optical fibers that connect the optical interfaces on the boards in a chassis, or on the device boxes. There are two types of labels for optical cables: l

One is for the fiber that connects the optical interfaces on two devices.

l

The other is for the fiber that connects the device and the ODF.

Labels for the Optical Fibers Connecting Devices Meaning of the Label Table 13-27 lists information on both sides of the labels affixed to the optical fibers that connect two devices. Table 13-27 Information on labels affixed to the fibers between two devices Content

Meaning

Example

MN-B-C-DR/T

MN: cabinet number

M: The cabinet rows from front to back are numbered from A to Z. N: The cabinet columns from left to right are numbered from 01 to 99. For example, A01 is the cabinet in row A and column 01.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

B: chassis number

Numbered in bottom-up order with two digits, for example, 01.

C: physical slot number

Numbered in top-down and left-right order starting from 01. For example, 01 is the first slot at the top left of the chassis.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

248

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

Content

13 Appendix

Meaning

Example

D: optical interface number.

Numbered in top-down and left-right order, consistent with the port sequence number on the device.

R: Receiving interface

-

T: optical transmitting interface

Example of the Label Figure 13-89 shows a sample label on an optical fiber. Figure 13-89 Sample label on an optical fiber between two devices 05

01

01

01

R

TO: G01

01

01

A01

T

The meaning of the label is listed in Figure 13-89. l

"A01-01-05-01-R" indicates that the local end of the optical fiber is connected to the optical receiving interface 01 in slot 5, chassis 01 in the cabinet in row A, column 01 in the machine room.

l

"G01-01-01-01-T" indicates that the opposite end of the optical fiber is connected with optical transmitting interface 01 in slot 01, chassis 01 in the cabinet in row G, column 01 in the machine room.

Labels for the Optical Fibers Connecting the Device and an ODF Meaning of the Labels Table 13-28 shows information on both sides of labels attached to an optical fiber between a device and an optical distribution frame (ODF). Table 13-28 Information on labels affixed to a fiber between a device and an ODF

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Content

Meaning

Example

MN-B-C-DR/T

MN: cabinet number

For example, A01.

B: chassis number

Numbered in bottom-up order with two digits, for example, 01.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

249

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

Content

13 Appendix

Meaning

Example

C: physical slot number

Numbered in top-down and left-right order starting from 01. For example, 01 is the first slot at the top left of the chassis.

D: optical interface number.

Numbered in top-down and left-right order, consistent with the port sequence number on the device.

R: Optical receiving interface

-

T: optical transmitting interface ODF-MN-BC-R/T

MN: row number and column number of an ODF

M: The cabinet rows from front to back are numbered from A to Z. N: The cabinet columns from left to right are numbered from 01 to 99. For example, G01 is the ODF of row G and column 01.

B: row number of the terminal device

Range from 01 to 99, for example, 01-01.

C: column number of the terminal device R: Optical receiving interface

-

T: optical transmitting interface

Example of the Label Figure 13-90 shows a sample label on an optical fiber. Figure 13-90 Sample label on an optical fiber between the device and the ODF 01

01

05

01

R

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

01

R

TO: A01

ODF G01

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

250

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

13 Appendix

Meaning of the label in Figure 13-90 l

"ODF-G01-01-01-R" indicates that the local end of the optical fiber is connected to the optical receiving terminal in row 01, column 01 of the ODF in row G, column 01 in the machine room.

l

"A01-01-05-01-R" indicates that the opposite end of the optical fiber is connected to optical receiving interface 1 in slot 05, chassis 01 in the cabinet in row A, column 01 in the machine room.

13.5.3 Engineering Labels for Network Cables Applicable Ranges The labels can be applied to Ethernet cables.

Label Content Table 13-29 shows the information on both sides of the labels affixed to Ethernet cables. You can also decide the label content based on the actual environment. If the device is not installed in the cabinet, for example, you can remove the cabinet number. Table 13-29 Information on the Ethernet cables Content

Meaning

Example

MN-B-C-D

MN: cabinet number

For example, A01 is the first cabinet in row A.

B: chassis number

Numbered in bottom-up order with two digits, for example, 01.

C: physical slot number

Numbered with two digits in top-down and leftright order. For example, 01.

D: network port number

Numbered in top-down and left-right orders. For example, 01.

MN: cabinet number

For example, B02 is the second cabinet in row B.

Z: Location number

Fill in the location number of the terminal device on site. If the cable is connected to a device in a cabinet, specify the serial numbers of the cabinet, the chassis, and the Ethernet interface of the device. For example, B02-03-12. If the cable is connected to the Network Management Station (NMS), specify the specific location of the NMS.

MN-Z

The contents of the labels for network cables connecting hubs and devices or agents and the network cables for other purposes should be specified according to actual connections. The details are as follows: Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

251

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

13 Appendix

l

For a network cable connecting a hub and device, the label on the hub end should indicate the numbers of the chassis and cabinet where the hub resides, and the serial number on the hub. The label on the device end should indicate the number of the chassis and cabinet where the device is located. If the device is a standalone device, provide the specific position of the device.

l

For a network cable connecting a hub and an agent or terminal, the label on the agent or terminal end should contain the serial number of the network interface. The definitions of the cabinet number and chassis number are the same as those described in Table 13-29.

l

If the hub is a standalone device without a cabinet or chassis, the label should contain specific location information that identifies the hub.

The serial number on the hub, the network interface number of the agent or terminal, and the location of the standalone device should be specified according to actual connections.

Label Example Figure 13-91 shows a sample label on an Ethernet cable. Figure 13-91 Sample label on an Ethernet cable 01

01

03

03

TO: B02

A01

01

Meaning of the label in Figure 13-91. l

"A01-03-01-01" indicates that one end of the network cable is connected to network interface 01 in slot 01, chassis 03 of the cabinet in row A, column 01 in the equipment room.

l

"B02-03-01" indicates that another end of the network cable is connected to network interface 01 in chassis 03 of the cabinet on row B, column 02 in the equipment room. No slot number is given.

13.5.4 Engineering Labels for User Cables Attach labels to both ends of a user cable to indicate the locations of the cable on the device and main distribution frame (MDF).

Meaning of the Engineering Labels for User Cables Table 13-30 shows the contents of the labels.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

252

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

13 Appendix

Table 13-30 Contents of the engineering labels for user cables Content

Meaning

Example

MN-B-C-D

MN: cabinet number

For example, A01 is the first cabinet in row A.

B: frame number

Numbered in the bottom-up order with two digits, for example, 03.

C: physical slot number

Numbered with two digits in top-down and leftright order. For example, 01.

D: cable number

Numbered with two digits in top-down and leftright order. For example, 01.

MN: row number and column number of the MDF

M: The rows of cabinets from front to back are numbered from A to Z. N: The columns of cabinets from left to right are numbered from 01 to 99. For example, G01 is the MDF of Row G and Column 01.

B: row number of the terminal device

Ranges from 01 to 99, for example, 01-01.

MDF-MN-B-C

C: column number of the terminal device

Example of the Label Figure 13-92 shows a sample label on a user cable. Figure 13-92 Sample label on a user cable 03

01

01

TO: MDF G01

01

A01

01

The meaning of the label in Figure 13-92 is as follows: l

"A01-03-01-01" indicates that the local end of the user cable is connected to port 1 in slot 1, chassis 03 of the cabinet in row A, column 01 in the equipment room.

l

"MDF-G01-01-01" indicates that the opposite end of the user cable is connected to the terminal in row 01, column 01 of the MDF in row G, column 01 in the equipment room.

13.5.5 Engineering Labels for Power Cables Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

253

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

13 Appendix

Engineering Labels for DC Power Cables These labels are affixed to the DC power cables that provide power supply for cabinets, including the -48 V, PGND, and BGND cables. Here, the DC power cables also include power cables and PGND cables. The labels for DC power cables are affixed to one side of the identification plates on cable ties. For details of the labels, see Table 13-31. Table 13-31 Contents of the label Content

Meaning

MN(BC)B--48Vn

MN(BC): BC is written right under MN. B: chassis number, numbered in bottom-up order with two digits, for example, 01. N: power socket number, numbered as 1 to 3 in the bottom-up and leftto-right orders. On the loaded cabinet side, only MN is used to identify the cabinet. On the power cabinet side, MN identifies the row and column number of the power distribution equipment like a control cabinet and distribution box, and BC identifies the row and column number of the -48 V connector. If there is no row number or column number, or the connector can be identified without them, BC can be omitted. It is unnecessary to identify the row and column number for BGND and PGND.

MN(BC)-BBGND MN(BC)-BPGND

The label only carries location information about the destination direction of the power cable whereas information about the local end is unnecessary. That is, the label only carries location information about the opposite equipment, the control cabinet, or the distribution box. Table 13-31 lists the information on two -48 V power supplies on the label. The information on other DC voltages, such as 24 V and 60 V should be given in similar methods. Make sure that labels are affixed in the correct direction. That is, after the cable ties are bundled onto the cable, the identification plates with the labels should face up, and the text on the labels in the same cabinet should be in the same direction. For details, see Figure 13-93. Figure 13-93 Example of the labels for DC power cables

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

254

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

13 Appendix

The meaning of the label in Figure 13-93 is as follows: l

On the loaded cabinet side, the label "A01/B08--48V2" on the cable indicates that the cable is -48 V DC supply, which is from the eighth connector in row B of -48 V bus bar in the cabinet in row A, and column 1 in the equipment room.

l

On the distribution box side, the label "B03--48V2" indicates that the cable is -48 V DC supply, connected to DC power socket 2 in row B, column 03 in the equipment room. NOTE

In the power distribution box or the first power cabinet of a row in a transmission equipment room, every terminal block on the -48 V connector bar has a numeric identification. For example, in the above label of "A01/B08--48V2", "08" (or sometimes "8") is the numeric identification of the terminal block.

PGND and BGND are two copper bars, on which the terminal blocks are short-circuited. Therefore, it makes no difference which terminal is connected to them. It is only necessary to give the row and column of the power distribution box, instead of giving the specific serial number of the terminal block on the copper bar. For example, if the label on the loaded cabinet side is "A01-BGND", it means that the power cable is a BGND that connects BGND copper bar in the power distribution box in row A, column 01 in the machine room. Information on the labels for PGND cables should be given in a similar way.

Engineering Labels for AC Power Cables These labels are affixed to both ends of an AC power cable that provides AC power supply to cabinets, including 110/220 V, PGND, and BGND cables. The 110/220 V AC cables and related PGND and BGND cables are covered with an insulating sheath, so the labels need to contain only the word "AC" and the cabinet numbers. The labels for AC power cables are affixed to one side of the identification plates on cable ties. For details, see Table 13-32. Table 13-32 Label content Content

Meaning

MN-(B)-ACn

MN: serial number of the cabinet or the socket where the power is led in B: chassis number, numbered in bottom-up order with two digits, for example, 01. n: power port number, numbered as 1 to 3 in bottom-up and left-to-right order. Serial number of the socket where the power is led in: the location of the socket is marked according to the actual situation. If the sockets can be identified by row numbers and column numbers, they can be numbered following the same rule for the cabinets. If the sockets cannot be identified by rows and columns, specify the detailed locations to avoid confusion with other sockets.

The label only carries location information about the opposite equipment and the power socket; information about the local end is unnecessary. Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

255

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

13 Appendix

Make sure that labels are affixed in the correct direction. That is, after the cable ties are bundled onto the cable, the identification plates with the labels should face up, and the text on the labels in the same cabinet should be in the same direction, as shown in Figure 13-94. Figure 13-94 Labels for AC power cables

Label on the loaded cabinet side (indicating the position of the cable on the power distribution box)

Label on the distribution box side (indicating the position of the cable on the loaded cabinet side)

Meaning of the label in Figure 13-94. l

On the equipment cabinet side, the label marked "A01-AC1" indicates that the power cable is connected to the first AC power socket of row A and column 01 in the equipment room.

l

On the power socket side, the label marked "B01-AC1" indicates that the power cable is connected to the first AC power socket in the cabinet of row B and column 01 in the equipment room.

13.6 Appendix F Guide to Using Optical Modules Common Faults of an Optical Module 1.

An optical module is not completely installed in position. If the optical module is not completely installed in position and the latch boss is not secured, the device cannot identify the optical module. After the optical module works for a long time, it will be ejected under external stress.

2.

The optical receptacle on an optical module is contaminated. If an optical module is not cleaned or protected properly, contaminants may accumulate on the fiber pin in the optical module. As a result, the coupling efficiency is reduced, optical signals are cut off, or even worse, the surface of the fiber pin is damaged permanently.

3.

An optical module is burnt. If high-power optical signals (caused by an optical time domain reflectometer or selfloop test) are transmitted through an optical module that is used for long-distance transmission but no optical attenuator is used, the optical power will exceed the overload power of the avalanche photodiode (APD). Then the optical module is burnt.

The preceding faults lead to temporary or long-term cut-off of optical signals; or even cause permanent damages to the optical module, affecting communication services. Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

256

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

13 Appendix

Measures to Prevent a Loosened Optical Module 1.

When installing an optical module, insert it in position. If you hear a click or feel a slight shake, it indicates that the latch boss is secured. If the latch boss is not secured, the gold finger of the optical module is not in good contact with the connector on the board. In this case, the link may be connected but optical signals will be cut off or the optical module will be loosened when the optical module is shaken or hit.

2.

Figure 13-95 shows the release handle on an optical module when it is open and closed. When inserting the optical module, make sure that the release handle is closed. At this time, the latch boss locks the optical module. After the optical module is inserted, try pulling it out to see if it is installed in position. If the optical module cannot be pulled out, it is secured.

Figure 13-95 State of the release handle

Close the release handle

Open the release handle

Measures to Prevent Receptacle Contamination 1.

Cleaning tissues must be prepared on site. You need to clean the optical connector before inserting it in the receptacle. This protects the receptacle against contamination on the surface of the optical connector. Figure 13-96 Cleaning optical fibers with special cleaning tissues

NOTE

Place at least three cleaning tissues on the work bench. As shown in Figure 13-96, wipe the end of an optical connector from left to right or from right to left on a cleaning tissue, and then move the connector end to the unused part of the cleaning tissue to continue.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

257

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

2.

13 Appendix

Cover an unused optical module with a protective cap to prevent dust, as shown in Figure 13-97. Figure 13-97 Installing a protective cap

If no protective cap is available, use fibers to protect the optical module, as shown in Figure 13-98. Figure 13-98 Using fibers to protect an optical module

3.

Cover unused optical connectors with protective caps, as shown in Figure 13-99, and then lay out fibers on the fiber rack or coil them in a fiber management tray to prevent fibers from being squeezed. Figure 13-99 Installing a protective cap on a fiber

4.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

If a receptacle or an optical connector has not been used for a long time and is not covered with a protective cap, you need to clean it before using it. Clean a receptacle with a cotton swab, as shown in Figure 13-100. Clean an optical connector with cleaning tissues.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

258

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

13 Appendix

Figure 13-100 Cleaning a receptacle with a cotton swab

NOTICE When cleaning a receptacle, insert the cotton swab and turn it slowly in the receptacle. Do not use too much strength because the receptacle may be damaged. 5.

If optical signals are lost during the operation of a device, use the preceding method to clean the receptacle or the optical connector. In this manner, the possibility of contamination can be excluded.

Measures to Prevent an Optical Module from Being Burnt 1.

Before using an optical time-domain reflectometer (OTDR) to test the connectivity or the attenuation of optical signals, disconnect the optical fibers from the optical module. Otherwise, the optical module will be burnt.

2.

When performing a self-loop test, use an optical attenuator. Do not loosen the optical connector instead of the optical attenuator.

1.

The optical connector should be vertically inserted in the receptacle to avoid damages to the receptacle.

2.

Fibers must be inserted into optical modules of the corresponding type. That is, multimode fibers must be inserted into multimode optical modules, and single mode fibers must be inserted into single mode optical modules. If a fiber is inserted into an optical module of a different mode, faults may occur. For example, optical signals will be lost.

Precautions

13.7 Appendix G Fault Tag *Customer name: Address: Contact person: Tel.: Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Fax: Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

259

S9300&S9300E Series Switches Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

13 Appendix

Category*: □ RMA □ Return □ Analysis BOM Code

Product Description

Bar Code*

Fault Occurring Date*

Description of the Fault Phenomena*

Category No.*

Software Version*

Reasons for Repairing (Category No.): Category No. includes the following eight types: F001 - Wear out damaged (◊ In warranty Period ◊ Out of warranty period) F002 - Deployment damaged F003 - Intransit damaged F004 - Version upgrade F005 - Batch replace F007 - Overdue spare parts inspecting F008 - Others F011 - Running circumstance change Note: l For optical interface cards returned, the optical interfaces should be covered with protection caps. l In general, the analysis card will not be returned to you. If you have any special requirements, please contact Huawei. l One Fault Tag should be adapted in one return category, such as RMA/Return/Analysis. l The items marked with "*" are the mandatory fields that you must fill in.

Issue 06 (2015-10-23)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

260